TX-NR1000 - Récepteur AV ONKYO - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL TX-NR1000 ONKYO

TX-NR5000E Instruction Manual

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit.

Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.

Please retain this manual for future reference.

Installation and Connections

Using the Remote Controller

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the À presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

intended 10 alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

K OF ELECT RSOUEDE QE NE

sh with arrowhead symbol, within an

the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock 10 persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

the literature accompanying the appliance.

Important Safety Instructions

Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. . Do not install near any heat sources such as radia- tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. À grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro- vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta- cles, and the point where they exit from the appara- tus.

. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

2. Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING tripod, bracket, or table spec- ified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use cau- tion when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. satR

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service

Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water,

D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,

E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in any way, and

EF When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service.

. Object and Liquid Entry

Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus through openings as they may touch dangerous volt- age points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus.

Don't put candles or other burning objects on top of this unit.

Always consider the environmental issues and fol- low local regulations when disposing of batteries.

. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade- quate ventilation.

Leave 20 em (8) of free space at the top and sides and 10 em (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4") away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like gap for warm air to escape.

1. Recording Copyright Unless it's for personal use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without permission of the copyright holder.

2. AC Fuse The AC fuse inside the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO00E is not user-serviceable. If you cannot turn on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E, contact your Onkyo dealer.

Occasionally you should dust the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRSO00E all over with a soft cloth. For stubborn Stains, use a soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water Dry the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRSO00E immediately afterwards with a clean cloth. Don't use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.

WARNING BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY. AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage requirements printed on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E"s rear panel (. AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

The Worldwide model has a voltage selector for compatibility with power systems around the world. Before you plug in this model, make sure that the voltage selector is set to the correct voltage for your area:

For USA, Canadian, and Australian models

Seting the [STANDB Y/ON] switch to STANDBY does not fully shutdown the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. If you do not intend to use the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E for an extended period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel IMPORTANT The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code

Brown: Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the termi- nal that is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire that is coloured brown must be connected to the ter- minal that is marked with the letter L or coloured red. IMPORTANT The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must be approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS À DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMPERE SOCKET. If in any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guide-

lines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the

cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the

building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC Information for User

User changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user's author-

ity to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-

quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmfüul interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip-

ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following measures:

+ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

+ _ Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

+ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

+ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For models having a power cord with a polarized plug: CAUTION:

Important Safety Instructions Precautions. Features . Supplied Accessories Connecting the Supplied Power Cord Before Using the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Ë Installing the Batteries … Using the Remote Controller Index Parts and Facilities Front Panels Inner Panels Rear Panel. Front Panel Display Remote Controller (Amp Mode).

Installation and Connections

Speaker Placement … Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater and the Function of Respective Speakers. Placing the Speakers. Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music Source such as DVD-Audi Available Speaker Placements According to the Number of Speakers … Connection Examples. Connecting Speakers. Connecting to the Speaker Terminal Connecting a Subwoofer … Connecting Auxiliary Power Amplifier (For Speaker System [A] only) . Using the BTL Connection Using Bi-amp Connection. Connecting Antennas .. Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna Connecting the AM Loop Antenna. Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna: Connecting AV Components. Types of Connection Cables and Terminals Connecting Monitors such as TV or Projector.. Connecting a DVD Player. Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR. (VIDEO 1) … Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3). Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS Tuner. Connecting a Portable DVD Player or Video Camcorder . Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner. Connecting a Recording Device such as MD Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder or Cassette Deck... Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO) Terminal ( à

Connection Using HDMI Terminals.… 43 Connecting Components not Reached by the Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT).... 45 If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Remote Sensor … 45 If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach Other Components . . Using an External Device with 12V Trigger Terminal mn Connecting RI-compatible AV Components Connections for Remote Control (fR1)

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons . ” To Operate the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Ë

(AMP Mode) … To Select an Input Source To Operate a Connected Component

(Mode Switching).. To Select a Source in Zone 2 or Zone 3. To Perform a Macro Operation Customizing Your Remote Controller

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations Turning on the Power. Operating on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000 Turning on the Power from the Remote

Controller. Operating with Remote Controller.

Using the Listening Modes Selecting the Listening Modk

Listening to Radio Broadcasts Using the Tuner … Tuning into a Radio Statioi

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only) Listening to RDS Broadcast PTY Program Types in Europe Displaying Radio Text (RT] Performing a PTY Scan Performing a TP Scan...

Enjoying Multichannel Playback How to Connect How to Set Up Playing Back in Multichannel Sound. Adjusting the Volume Level of Speakers for

Multichannel Playback. .

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3). Connecting and Setup Enjoying Movies and Music in a Remote

Recording a Sourc Recording Audio/Video While Playing …… Recording Audio/Video on a Component While

Playing Another ..70 Recording the Video from One Source and the

Audio from Another Source

Enjoying Net Audio. About Net-Tune

Table of Contents —Continued

Using the Remote Controller

Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller …

Operating Onkyo Products Using the I Connection. DVD Mode. CD Mode … MiniDisc Mode. Tape Mode

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components... Entering a Remote Control Code . Learning Commands from Another Remote

Controller .. Using Macros.

Other Settings for the Remote Controller. Editing Remote Controller Modes. Resetting the Remote Controller Using the Remote Controller with Radio

Frequency (RC-558M only)... Changing the Remote Controller's

Control ID Miscellaneous

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode . Troubleshooting

Remote Controller . Recording .… Zone 2/Zone 3.

Error Messages Specifications.

Amplifier Features Next Generation User Interface

+ 192 kHz/24-Bit DAC for AI Channels + HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)

+ Color-Coded Heavy Duty Dual Banana Plug + i.Link (IEEE1394) Digital Input for DVD-Audio Compatible Transparent Speaker Posts and SACD

+ Color-Coded 7.1 Multi-Channel Inputs and Pre + _Net-Tune Function with MP3/WAV/WMA Outs Decoding

Powered Zone 2 and Zone 3 5 12V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/

Ethernet Plug-In Capability and 1 Output Bi-Directional RS-232 Port to download new

Outputs programs and provide easy interface with

+ Massive, Shielded Toroidal Transformer, the kind touchscreen controllers from other manufacturers you find only in the best high end audio equipment, to + Composite and S Video to Component Video provide copious amounts of pure current Upconversion (NTSC and PAL Compatible)

+ Huge Custom Designed Audio Tuned Reference + Speaker A and B Mode for 7.1 Channels Capacitors to deliver greater power at low + BTL and Bi-Wiring Connectable for FL/FR with frequencies, and provide tremendous continuous SBR/SBL power reserves during the most dynamic sound + Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips for high grade main and effects and music demands multizone decoding

+ Powerful Transistors. These high power, high + 512V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/ quality transistors are ready to amplify your electrical Outputs for multizone operation of multiple signals for the highest performance possible components

+ High Grade Dual Aluminum Extruded Heatsinks + Individual Crossover Adjustment and auto-switched cooling fan to keep things cool when the action gets hot FWAM Tuner Features

WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)

Optimum Gain Volume Cireuitry * 40 FM/AM Presets

THX Ultra? Certified THX Surround EX, DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix 6.1, DTS NEO:6, DTS 96/24, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic H/IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual

+ VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry)

Solid Aluminum Volume Knob for quality you can feel—ergonomically pleasing and convenient for those quick in-the-dark level changes

Surround à | + 4 Wideband Component Video Inputs and 2 + Separate PC Boards to keep audio and video signals Outputs completely separate

Rec Out Selector (On Front) to tape one program while watching or listening to another

Gold-Plated RCA Jacks to resist corrosion and provide distortion-free signal tran: on

2 Sets of Color-Coded Heavy Duty, Transparent, Dual-Banana-Plug Speaker Terminals for all channels to provide distortion-free signal transfer and accommodate heavy gauge speaker cable Impeccable Quality Materials —à heavy gauge, reinforced steel chassis, rigid aluminum panels and brazen stabilizers to enhance overall chassis stability + Large Multi-Emitter Output Transistors to provide faster switching speed, which translates into a wider dynamic range

Zone 2 Multiroom/Multisource (audio and video) to set up additional rooms

Detachable Heavy Duty IEC Power Cord to minimize interference from external sources and increase power stability—detachable for ease of installation

Dual Monitor Outputs (S Video/Composite) to route the onscreen signal to a small monitor and make adjustments without distracting the audience

13 Digital Inputs (1 Optical on Front) (7 Optical/6 Coaxial/12 Assignable) to connect any variety of digital sources to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's powerful digital processor

4 Digital Outputs (2 Optical/2 Coaxial/4 Assignable) 10 make direct digital dubs to other digital devices Wolfson 192 kHz/24-Bit D/A Converters for all channels

Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips for high grade main and multizone decoding

Non-Scaling Configuration

+ A-Form Listening Mode Memory

In catalogs and on packaging, the letter added to the end of the product name indicates the color of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Specifications and operation are the same regardless of color.

+ THX is a trademark or registered trademark of THX Ltd

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby.” “Pro Logic." “Surround EX.” and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

96/24: “DTS-ES." and “NEO:6" are trademarks

al Theater Systems, Inc.

The LINK logo is a trademark of Sony Corporation, registered @ “US amor conti

B Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ" logo are trademarks of THX Lid. Net-Tune” is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trandemarks, or

registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other

+_ Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. +" MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and THOMSON multimedi: + Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation. + Niles is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation:

“This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited”

Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra? certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra? logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years 10 come, THX Ultra? requirements define hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra? receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.. THX Mode) which accurately translate film soundtracks for home theater playback.

Declaration of Conformity

We, ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6, 82194 GROEBENZELL, GERMANY

declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the corresponding technical standards such as EN60065, EN55013, ENS5020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.

1. MORI ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH Oo

Supplied Accessories

Make sure you have the following accessories:

Connecting the Supplied Power Cord

Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET. Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied

AM Loop Antenna (not supplied with USA and Cana- with the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The power cord

dian models) supplied is designed for use with the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E and should not be used with any other device.

Never have the power cord disconnected from the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E while the other end is plugged into the wall outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always connect by plugging into the wall outlet last and disconnect by unplugging from the wall outlet first.

Indoor FM antenna (not supplied with USA and Canadian models) {connector type varies from country to country)

Power Cord (supplied)

> LS USD DO NOT connect the

power cord at this time.

Terminal Wrench A wrench to screwlunscrew the speaker terminal cap.

Only supplied in certain countries. Use this adapter if your AC outlet does not match the plug on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's power cord (adapter varies from country to country).

SA Before Using the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press the small hollow and slide off the cover.

2 Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6) in accordance with the polarity diagram inside the battery compartment.

Put the cover onto the remote controller and slide it shut.

+ The supplied batteries should last for about six months, although this will vary with usage.

If the remote controller doesn't work reliably, try replacing the batteries.

Don't mix new and old batteries, or different types of batteries.

If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time, remove the batteries to prevent possible leakage and corrosion.

Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.

Using the Remote Controller

To use the remote controller, point it at the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's remote control sensor, as shown below. The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E’s [STANDBY/] indicator flashes while a signal is being received from the remote controller.

Remote control sensor TX-NR1000/

+ The remote controller may not work reliably if the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is subjected to bright light, such as direct sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in mind when installing the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

If another remote controller of the same type is used in the same room, or the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is installed close to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote controller may not work reliably.

Don't put anything, such as a book, on the remote controller, because the buttons may be pressed inadvertently, thereby draining the batteries.

The remote controller may not work reliably if the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSOO0E is installed in a rack behind colored glass doors. Keep this in mind when installing the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

The remote controller will not work if there's an obstacle between it and the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000Es remote control sensor.

(RC-558M only) You can set the transmission signal format to infrared (IR), or radio frequency (RF) for use with the optional RF Receiver. s useful when, for example, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is installed in a rack or is not in line of sight of the remote controller.

To select AMP mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears on the display.

Index Parts and Facilities

Here is an explanation of the controls and displays on the front panel of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

The specifications for your model may differ due to regional requirements.

USA, Canadian, and Australian models

SA Index Parts and Facilities —Continued

For further operational instructions, see the pages indicated in brackets [ ].

@ POWER switch (for all models other than USA, Canadian, and Australian models) [50] Press to turn on and off the main power supply for the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. When the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is turned on with the [POWER] switch, the [STANDBY] indicator lights. + Before turning on the power, check to make sure

that all cords are properly connected.

When the power is turned on, a sudden surge of

current will occur that may adversely affect the

operation of other devices. To prevent this, do not plug the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E into the same circuit used by sensitive equipment, e.g., computers.

@) STANDBY indicator [9, 50]

Lights when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is in the standby state and when a signal is received from the remote controller.

© STANDBY/ON button [50] If pressed with the [POWER] switch turned on (with the receiver plugged in for USA, Canadian, and Australian models), the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E turns on and the display lights up. If pressed again, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E returns to the standby State. In the standby state, the display is turned off and the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E cannot be operated.

() Remote control sensor [9]

@ DISPLAY button [54] Press to display information about the current input source signal. Each time you press the [DISPLAY] button, the screen changes to show you different information concerning the input signal.

® Input source buttons and indicators (DVD, VIDEO 1-7, TAPE 1-2, TUNER, PHONO, CD, and NET AUDIO) [50, 60, 63, 76] Press these buttons to select the input source for the main zone. After selecting the input source, the corresponding indicator turns blue. If you select Zone 2, the indicator turns green. If you select Zone 3 or Rec, the indicator turns red.

© MASTER VOLUME dial [50] Use to control the volume in the main zone. The volume for the remote zone (Zone 2 and Zone 3) is independent.

() OPEN button Press this button to open the front panel door.

{© PURE AUDIO indicator [59] Lights during pure audio playback.

Index Parts and Facilities —Continued

USA, Canadian, and Australian models

Index Parts and Facil

Press this button to enter the setup mode for the listening mode. Turning the [SELECT/PRESET] allows you to select the listening mode. To confirm your selection and exit the setup mode, press the ISELECT/PRESET].

Press this button to enter the audio selector mode. Turning the [SELECT/PRESET] allows you to select the audio mode.

Press this button to enter the tone adjustment mode. Turning the [SELECT/PRESET] allows you to select the channel to adjust the tone. To adjust the tone level, turn the [CONTROL/TUNING].

Press this button to enter the Zone 2 configuration mode. Turning the [SELECT/PRESET] allows you 10 select the input source for Zone 2. Also, if you want to configure other Zone 2 settings such as Standby/on setting, listening mode, volume adjustment, audio selector mode, and display settings, press this button first.

REC/ZONE 3 button [68, 70]

Press this button to enter the Rec/Zone 3 mode. Turning the [CONTROL/TUNING] allows you to select the input source for the Rec mode or Zone 3. Also, if you want to configure the setting for Zone 3 including standby/on setting or volume adjustment, press this button first.

Recording and Zone 3 operations uses the same circuit and therefore cannot be used at the same time.

VIDEO 7 INPUT terminals For connecting a video camera or game device.

ZONE 3 LEVEL button [68] Press this button to enter the volume adjustment mode for Zone 3. Turning the [SELECT/PRESET] allows you to adjust the volume.

CONTROL/TUNING dial [52, 60, 68, 70, 86] When the input source is FM or AM, tuning this jog dial allows you to select the frequency to receive. When used with other buttons, this [CONTROL/ TUNING] dial is used to select the mode settings or values. Also the dial is pressed to confirm the settings or values you select.

Press this button to enter the setup mode. First, select the parameter to change by turning the ISELECT/PRESET] and press the [SELECT/ PRESET] to confirm the parameter. Then, change the parameter value by turning the [CONTROL/ TUNING] and press the [CONTROL/TUNING] to confirm the value.

@ EXIT button [86] Press this button to return to the last menu. To exit from the setup mode, press the [SETUP] button again.

@) SELECT/PRESET dial [59, 61, 63, 68, 71, 86] When the input source is FM or AM, turning this jog dial allows you to switch between your preset stations. When used with other buttons, the ISELECT/PRESET] dial is used to select the mode settings or parameters. Also the dial is pressed to confirm the settings or parameters you select.

@ ZONE 2 LEVEL button [68] Pressing this button enters the volume adjustment mode for Zone 2. To adjust volume, turn the ISELECT/PRESET].

DIMMER button (Other than European models) [52]

Press to set the brighiness of the front display. There are four settings available: normal, dark, very dark, and volume only.

For European models, this function can be operated only with the remote controller.

@) RT/PTY/TP button (European models only) [63] This button is only available on European models. Press this button to tune into the Radio Data System (RDS) for FM broadcasting. RDS was developed within the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. Each time the button is pressed, the display changes from RT (radio text) to PTY (program type) to TP (traffic program) and then back to RT again.

@& MEMORY button [61] Press to assign the radio station, to which you are currently tuned, as a preset channel or press to delete a previously preset station.

& TUNING MODE button [60, 61] This button is used to select the Auto or Manual Tuning Mode.

& PHONES jack [52] This is a standard stereo jack for connecting stereo headphones.

SA Index Parts and Fa

This terminal is provided for future service enhancement and is not used currently. Never plug the cable connector for

other terminals into this terminal.

(ÿ) i.LINK S400 (AUDIO) terminals

Some of the Asian models are not equipped with the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminals.

These connectors are for connecting to the i. LINK (AUDIO)-ready device using a 4-pin (S400) i. LINK (AUDIO) cable. The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E complies with the standards on audio only transimissions.

This connector is for connecting to an Ethernet network. DIGITAL OPTICAL IN/OUT

e inputoutput terminals for digital sound signal. The sound quality equals the signal passed through the COAXIAL terminals.

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN/OUT The inputoutput terminals for digital sound signal. The sound quality equals the signal passed through the OPTICAL terminals.

This connector is for connecting components with a multichannel output.

Two sets of multichannel input terminals are available on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E.

AUDIO IN/OUT These connectors are for connecting to the audio input and output jacks on audio/video components. To connect a turntable, connect to the PH jacks.

In addition to the PH jacks, the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E offers nine input and five output jacks.

7 VIDEO/S VIDEO IN/OUT These connectors are for connecting to the video input and output jacks on video components. Six input and 4 output jacks are available for each of VIDEO and S VIDEO connection.

8 COMPONENT VIDEO IN/OUT These connectors are for connecting to the component

video outputs/inputs of video components that have them.

European and Asian models are equipped with three inputs and one output for the RCA-type COMPONENT connection and one input and output for the BNC-type COMPONENT connection.

For other than European and Asian models, there are four inputs and two outputs for the RCA-type COMPONENT connection.

Check the type of terminals or jacks on the device to connect before making connections.

These jacks are for connecting the FM indoor antenna and the AM loop antenna that are supplied with the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E.

HDMI IN/OUT This interface can transfer digital audio and video signals simultaneously. The terminal can be connected to the HDMI terminal on the components such as DVD player, set top box (B tuner), projector, and digital TV.

RIREMOTE CONTROL This jack is for connecting other Onkyo components equipped with the same RI terminal. The audio connection cables must also be connected.

SA Index Parts and Facilities —Continued

12 RS 232 This port is for connecting the TX-NR 1000/ TX-NRS000E to home automation and external controllers.

13 PRE OUT A/B To use the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E as a preamplifier, connect a power amplifier to this jack.

14 SPEAKERS A/B These terminals are for connecting the speakers. Two sets of home theater connections are available (simultaneous playback of different sources in each of two home theaters is not supported). Depending on your system, various speaker connections will be available. For example, you can use the surround back speakers for playback in a different room.

15 AC OUTLET The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is equipped with AC mains outlets for connecting the power cords from other devices so that their power is supplied through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. By doing this, you can leave the connected device turned on and have the [STANDB Y/ON] button on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E turn on and off the

device together with the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

The shape, number, and total capacity of the AC outlets may differ depending on the area of purchase.

Make sure that the total capacity of the components connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E does not exceed the capacity that is printed on the rear panel (e.g., AC 120V - 60Hz SWITCHED 120W 1A MAX.)

AC INLET This connector is for connecting the supplied power cord.

IR IN/OUT These connectors are for connecting the remote sensor of a multiroom kit (sold separately).

The connectors are provided for main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3.

12V TRIGGER OUT These connectors are used to connect to the 12V TRIGGER IN terminal of a component. Available connectors are one With maximum current capacity of 200 mA and four with 100 mA.

TT DE F A Listening mode or input format indicators One of these indicators lights to show the format of the current input source. In addition, one of the listening mode indicators lights to indicate the current listening mode.

B Multifunction display During normal operation, shows the current input source. When the FM or AM input is selected, shows the frequency and preset number. When the [DISPLAY] button is pressed, shows the listening mode and input source format.

C Audio input signal path indicators Shows from which terminal the audio input signal is coming.

D MAIN AB indicators Indicates which room is currently in use.

E SLEEP indicator Lights when the sleep timer is turned on.

F Tuning indicators AUTO indicator Lights when receiving FM broadcasts in the stereo mode. Turns off when placed into the monaural mode.

RDS indicator (European models only) Lights when an RDS station is being received. b-TUNED-4 indicator

Lights when a radio station is being received. MEMORY indicator

Lights when the [MEMORY] button is pressed to preset a radio station.

Lights when an FM broadcast station is being received in stereo. Turns off when placed into the monaural mode.

Program format display

When the input source is DVD video, Super Audio CD, or compressed digital audio signal such as Dolby Digital and DTS, the channels corresponding 10 the input source light.

Shows the volume level.

Video input signal path indicators

Shows from which terminal the video input signal is coming.

Remote Controller (Amp Mode)

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E’s remote controller is a multipurpose device that can be used to control not just the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E but your other AV components as well. This section explains how its various operating modes can be used to control the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. When you use the Net- Tune mode, see page 74 for details. See page 124-136 for information on using the remote controller to control Onkyo components connected via RI and TVs, VERS, and AV components made by other manufacturers.

ÈS _ @ = D — Ce] [ED (SUITE

o 3 Ge me @ 2e + @ @— 1? VS GC) Gr ® ® @

RC-557M RC-558M Amp mode is used to control the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. To select Amp mode, press the scroll wheel. AMP” appears on the display. Note: While neither the [INPUT] button nor the [MODE] button is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously. ON button

his button is used to turn on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. STANDBY button his button is used to set the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E to Standby.

@) Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters.

CUSTOM button This button is used to access various settings that you can use to customize the operation of the remote controller. @) MACRO button This button is used with the Macro function. MODE button This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. ?) DIMMER button

his button is used to adjust the display brightness. © Up/Down/Left/Right [A J/[ V JI-d]/[b>-] & ENTER buttons These buttons are used to select items on the onscreen setup menus (OSD). The [ENTER] button is also used to enter names and to confirm settings. CH +/- button This button is used to select radio presets. @) RETURN button This button is used to return to the previously displayed onscreen setup menu (DSD). DISPLAY button This button is used to display various information about the currently selected input source. MAIN A button For the speakers used in main room À, every press of this button toggles the status between enabled and disabled. THX button This button is used to select the THX listening modes. SURR button This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS listening modes.

SA Index Parts and Facil

{3 DIRECT button This button is used to select the Direct listening mode.

d) PURE A button This button is used to select the Pure Audio listen- ing mode.

@ TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL- & LEVEL+ buttons These buttons are used to adjust the level of each speaker individually. These functions can be set only with the remote controller. The [LEVEL-] and ILEVEL+] buttons are also used to adjust the volume in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

{3 AUDIO SEL button This button is used to select the audio input signal format: analog, digital, multichannel, or i. LINK. 4) LIGHT button This button is used to turn on or off the remote con- troller’s illuminated buttons.

@ DIRECT TUNING button This button is used with the number buttons to select a radio station by entering its frequency. Press this button first, and then use the number buttons to enter the frequency.

@) Display The top line of this LCD display shows the name of the currently selected input source. The bottom line shows the currently selected remote controller mode.

@ ZONE 3 button This button is used when you want to set the volume and input source for Zone 3. €) ZONE 2 button This button is used when you want to set the volume and input source for Zone 2. €? INPUT button This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until the name of the input source appears on the display. € SLEEP button This button is used to set the Sleep function. This function can be set only with the remote controller. € VOL 1/1 button This button is used to set the volume of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. @) SETUP button This button is used to access the onscreen setup menus (OSD) that appear on the TV. € MUTING button This button is used to mute the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

@ MAIN B button For the speakers used in main room B, every press of this button toggles the status between enabled and disabled.

@) STEREO button This button is used to select the Stereo listening mode.

@& -« DSP/DSP æ buttons These buttons are used to select the listening modes.

@) Re-EQ button This button is used to turn on and off the Re-EQ function.

@ L NIGHT button This button is used to set the Late Night function.

Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater and the Function of Respective Speakers

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E has many excellent features to recreate a clear three-dimensional sound image and lively sound movement. This enables you to enjoy, at home, the rich sound effects of a live theater or concert hall performance. When playing a DVD, you can enjoy sound effects provided by DTS or Dolby Digital, depending on recording format. In addition, you can enjoy THX sound and Onkyo’s proprietary DSP surround playback for TV or digital satellite broadcasts.

Front left and right speakers Outputs overall sound. They play the most important role in a home theater system, by creating basic sound images and fields

Center speaker Complements the sound effects from front left and right speakers to enrich and clear the sound image and movement. In movies, an actor's speech comes mainly from the center speaker.

Surround back speakers Enhances the sound space representation with surround channel signals Recreating sound movement effects and sound fields behind the listener gives a more realistic experience.

Outputs only bass sounds to enhance and complement bass sound effects.

D Surround left and right speakers Enhances the sensation of being at a live performance by giving three-dimensional sound movement to the sound effects.

+_ For optimum surround playback, set the distance between the listener and the speakers so that the time it takes the sound to reach the listener is same. Also, you need to set each speaker volume level individually in order to balance the volume level between speakers (See pages 88 and 90).

Speaker Placement—Continued

Placing the Speakers

To fully enjoy surround sound, the configuration and placement of the speakers used are important. Be sure to read through the descriptions in the previous page and shown below. This section provides the examples and descriptions that assume a typical situation.

Front Left and Right Speakers, and Center Speaker

Place the front left and right speakers symmetrically and so that the distance from the listening position is the same.

+ When placing speakers, direct the speakers toward the position of the listener’s ears where the listener sits to enjoy " muse Or movies Æe ©

+ Place the three speakers so that the heights of the three So speakers are aligned, The ideal height for the speakers is the Ni height of the listener’s ears. When placing the center C1 speaker above or below the TV, tilt it toward the listener's ä

ears. Place the center speaker as close to the screen or monitor as

possible and in the center between the left and right front speakers. When placing the center speaker near the TV, use a shielded speaker. If no center speaker is used, place the left and right front speakers closer to each other.

Left and Right Surround Speakers

Place these speakers on each side of, or angled behind, the listener.

Place the surround speakers symmetrically from the listener position and so that the distance from the listener is equal between left and right surround speakers.

When enjoying mainly movies, placing the surround speakers about 3 feet (1 m) higher than the height of the listener’s ears, results in more of a surround effect.

When enjoying mainly music, placing the surround speakers at the height of the front speakers may provide a Surround Back better surround effect.

When using surround back speakers in addition to the surround speakers, placing the surround speakers slightly forward from their current position will make the sound movement smoother.

Surround Back Speakers

Place the speakers about 3 feet (1 m) or higher than the height of the listener’s ears.

When using one surround back speaker, place it behind the listener.

When using two surround back speakers, place them behind the listener so that the angles between the lines from each surround back speaker to the listener and a line Straight back from the listener are about 30 degrees, forming an equilateral triangle of the listener and the two surround back speakers.

#When using a THX-certified speaker system, also refer to

“Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio” on the next page.

Speaker Placement—Continued

Using a subwoofer greatly improves the volume level and sound quality of bass sounds. The subwoofer effect depends not only on the listening position but also on the shape of the listening room.

In general, place the subwoofer in a corner of the room or at a point 1/3 the width of the room.

Play a movie or music that contains high quality bass sounds to determine the subwoofer placement. Change the subwoofer’s position and check the effect, then select the position where the bass sounds are best heard.

You can place two subwoofers for more powerful and richer heavy bass sounds.

Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio

To enjoy sources using the THX Cinema or THX Surround EX technology, we recommend using a THX speaker system from

THX Lid. A speaker system supporting the THX Ultra2 = 2; standard is best suited for THX Ultra2 Cinema or THX Music F4 æ

The layout example on the right represents a case using the dipole speakers. À dipole speaker is a two-way directivity speaker that outputs the same sound in two directions such as forward and backward.

Most dipole speakers are marked with an arrow indicating how 10 they should be oriented in the room in order to match their phases*, Dipole surround speakers should be placed so that their arrows point forward toward the screen, and dipole surround back speakers should be placed so that their arrows point toward each other.

*Phase: The word represents the waveform position in one cycle (0 10 360 degrees) of a sine wave. If the phase does not match between multiple waveforms due to the distance between multiple speakers, the speaker orientation, or the miswiring of positive and negative poles, the sound image or space may be obscured or the sound may be less easy to listened 10.

When playing the source in the THX Ultra? Cinema or THX Music Mode format using two surround back speakers supporting the THX Ultra? standard, place them as close together as possible. After placing the surround back speakers, perform the settings described in the “THX Audio Setup” (page 91).

Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music Source such as DVD-Audio

This placement is based on the ITU-R* recommendation. In this placement, five

Layout with dipole speakers

1 TVorscreen 2 Subwoofer

3 Front left speaker

5 Front right speaker

6 Surround left speaker 7 Surround right

8 Surround back left speaker

9 Surround back right speaker

10 Listening position

speakers with the same performance capabilities are used for front left and right, center, and left and right surround speakers, and they are placed so that the distances between every speaker and the listening position are equal to each other and the heights of the speaker and the listener’s ears are in the same. À mixing studio used for making multichannel DVD-Audio source material adopts this placement.

SA Speaker Placement—Continued

Available Speaker Placements According to the Number of Speakers

The following speaker placements will be available according to the number of speakers connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. For the number of speaker channel, _.1 ch represents a subwoofer.

Key to abbreviations: FL: Front left speaker, FR: Front right speaker, C: Center speaker, SL: Surround left speaker, SR: Surround right speaker, SBL: Surround back left speaker, SBR: Surround back right speaker, SW: Subwoofer

2ch/2.1 ch This placement is used with two speakers (front left and

right speakers). It is optimum for 2 ch sources including analog 2 ch, 2 ch ä linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, DTS96/24, and AAC format sources. When the number of channels in the source is 3.1 or greater, the signals will be distributed hrough the left and right channels accordingly.

This placement is used with three speakers (front left,

front right, and center

speakers). When the number of channels in the source is 4.1 or greater, the signal for

ä& surround and surround back channels will be output through the front left and right speakers.

In this placement, when the number of channels in the

source is 5.1 or greater, the center channel signal will be output through the front left g and right speakers, and the

surround back channels will be output through the surround speakers.

is placement is suitable for playing 5.1 ch sources including analog multichannel, Dolby Digital, DTS, and AAC format sources. When the

à source is 2 ch or mono, the f El signal will be decoded with

Dolby Pro Logic Il or DTS NEO:6 format and played as 5.1 ch sources. When the number of channels in the source is 6.1 or greater, the surround back signal will be distributed through the surround left and right speakers accordingly.

6 ch/6.1 ch/7 ch/7.1 ch (with center speaker)

= This placement is suitable for playing 6.1 ch sources including DTS-ES Matrix/ Discrete and Dolby Surround EX format signals. G à E When you use two surround back speakers, the same signal will be output from them because the surround back channel is mono. When the source is 2 ch or mono, it will be decoded with the Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6 format and played as 6.1/7.1

This placement is suitable for playing 5.1 or 6.1 ch sources when the surround back sound is much more preferred than the center sound with less speaker units than the normal configuration. The center channel signal will be output through the front left and right speakers.

Speaker Placement—Continued

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E has two speaker terminal blocks for speaker system [A] and [B]. This allows you to

build two 7.1 ch home theater systems, and various speaker placements and connections are also available. For

example, some channels of either speaker system can be used for another room (Zone 2), or you can select one of two

speaker systems for playback according to the source.

When you use two speaker systems, you have to associate the speakers with the zone (e.g., Main A, Main B, etc.).

After making the association, for example, pressing the “MAIN A” button on the remote controller will output the

source from the speakers configured as “Main A Here are some examples of speaker placement and zone association, These examples can be your reference when you

build your own home theater system. The illustration on the right represents the actual settings displayed corresponding to

each example. For details on configuring speaker placement and zone association, see page 88.

*n the following illustrations, white speakers denote speaker system [A] and gray ones denote speaker system [B].

*Key to abbreviations FL: Front left speaker; FR: Front right speaker; C: Center speaker; SL: Surround left speaker; SR: Surround right speaker; SBL: Surround back left speaker; SBR: Surround back right speaker; SW: Subwoofer

When you wish to configure 7.1 ch speaker system in the main room A only, the initial setting can be used without any modification.

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system; Main room B: 7.1ch speaker system

ET 1. (La) EE = spellez à a.Eront L/R [Fair 2] Bccenter + [ain À Main room A Main room B géur Le fai à]

[SEL] FER] [SEL] ER]

+ Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A”

+ Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main B”

+ Pressing the [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] button causes the sound to be output from the speaker system associated with the zone button. Both speaker systems cannot be selected simultaneously.

* If you set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A” and play a single

source, the same audio signal will be output from both speaker systems [A] and [B].

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system; Main room B: 5.1 ch speaker system; Sub room (Zone 2): 2 ch speakers

Main room A E] E Eu ES]

k- Main B Powered Powered Zone 2}

diteetes CIRE Bt) (SEA Zone 2 s ee ER E Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.” Set the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main B” and “Zone 2” accordingly.

Both main room À and B cannot be used simultaneously. However, while either of the main

rooms is used, you can enjoy a different source in Zone 2.

Note that when you use Zone 2, the surround back speakers for main room A cannot be used since Zone 2 uses the surround back speaker circuit for main room A.

\ —E Speaker Placement—Continued Main room À: 7.1 ch speaker systems and the two additional front speakers (When you want to use speaker system [A] for movies and enjoy 7.1 surround sound and the two additional front speakers for classic mu 1-1.Speaker Config 3-3.Stereo speer À a.rront L/R[* æ ne Deeme % ï e.Suer L xont Speaker Main room A G'Sue LR b.Front Speaker: B 8 El KL <.Subwoofer: À ge e-subueoter &æ £.Front L/R æ g.Center NOt Déedte PSurr L/R Not Usedé SET sa 2 FKot sea subwoofer :Not UsediB : ns Here is an example of the stereo sources. + Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A” + Set the front speaker parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A.” +_If you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the source and set the front speaker setting parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu. When you want to output to both speaker systems simultaneously, you can choose the “A+B” setting unless any of the speakers has an impedance of 8 ohm or lower. + To output the sound, press the [MAIN A] button on the remote controller. Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system and the two additional front speakers connected through the BTL or bi-amp connection (when you want to use either the 7.1 ch speakers or the additional front — S speakers according to the source) E speïer à a. Re-E0/Acadeny a.ront L/R [MATRA] @@ Of Ê.Center À] @œ Main room À geSure LR al @ b.Front Speaker: B @ El œ <.Subwoofer: À L2 e.subwooter[:Main A] @ Speaker £.Eront L/R gæ g.Center :Not Used@@ ÉSurr L/R Not Used@® l'sugx Back = subueorer Net Ur : ? Es æ Here is an example of the stereo sources.

Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”

+ For speaker system [B], set the front speaker parameters to “Main A” and the surround back speaker parameters to “BTL for Front ” or “Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on connections, see page 27).

When you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the source and set the front speaker parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu.

*When using the BTL or bi-amp connections, the two speaker systems cannot be used to output simultaneously due to the speaker impedance limitation.

Speaker Placement—Continued

Main room À: 5.1 ch speaker system including the front speakers connected through the BTL or bi- amp connections

(ra 1-1.Speaker Config œ

Ê] E Front L/R :Not Used@

+ For speaker system [A], set the surround back speaker parameters to “BTL for Front ” or “Bi-Amp for Front” and all the other speaker parameters to “Main A” (For details on speaker connections, see page 27).

+ For speaker system [B], set the speaker parameters to “Not Used.”

*When using the BTL or bi-amp connections, you cannot use Zone 2 since the surround back channel is used for the front speakers of

Main room A: 7.1 ch from the speaker system [A] and additional subwoofer and surround speakers from speaker system [B] (suitable for enjoying more powerful and lively surround sound in main room À); Main room B: two front speakers from speaker system [B] using the BTL or bi-amp connections

ral E Las cie 3: u œ # #| | MainroomB } e il b.Re-EQ Of£@® Main room À 5 ë _ â El a : cine ae — = EE subwoofer :A45@ | El £.rront 1/* LT] 6 5 See. Dam RSS 7e = PB ge 2 1.subvosrer æ E œ

Here is an example of the multichannel sources.

For speaker system [A], set all the speaker parameters to “Main A.”

For speaker system [B], set the surround speaker and subwoofer parameters to “Main A,” the front speaker parameters to “Main B,” and the surround back speaker parameters to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on speaker connection, see page 27).

When you want to use the surround speakers and subwoofer of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the source and set the parameters for these speakers to “B” or “A+B” in the listening mode setup menu.

When you set the parameter to “B,” the audio signal comes out from the surround speakers and subwoofer of speaker system [B]. When you set the parameter to “A+B," the signal comes out from the surround speakers and subwoofer of both speaker systems [A] and [B].

SA Connecting Speakers

Connecting to the Speaker Terminals

After determining the layout of your speaker system, it is now necessary to connect the speakers correctly to your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

For the USA and Canadian models, you can also use banana plugs/connectors.

Connect only speakers with an impedance between 4 and 16 Q to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. If the impedance of even one speaker is between 4 and 6 Q, be sure to set the speaker impedance setting accordingly (See page 89). Notes:

+ Even if you are using only one speaker or listening to monaural (mono) sound, never connect a single speaker in parallel to both the right and left channel terminals.

+ Toprevent circuitry damage, never short-circuit the positive (+) and negative (—) speaker wire.

Be sure to connect the positive and #7 negative cables for the speakers properly. If they are mixed up, the left and right signals will be reversed and the audio will sound unnatural.

Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one speaker terminal. Doing so may damage the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Connecting the Speaker Cable

1. Strip away approx. 5/8 inch (15 mm) of the wire insulation.

Twist the wire ends tightly together.

Unscrew the speaker terminal cap.

Insert the exposed wire end.

Tighten speaker terminal cap.

RATS The terminal wrench that comes with this unit is a useful tool for tightening/ loosening the speaker terminal cap.

Attaching the Speaker Labels

The positive speaker terminals on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E are color coded for easy identification. Attach the supplied speaker labels to the speaker cables, and then match the colors on the speaker cables to the corresponding terminals.

Speaker label Speaker label

The speaker channels are colored as follows: Front left speaker (+): White

ENS TX-NR5000E Surround Surround right left speaker speaker

Connecting Speakers —Continued

Connecting a Subwoofer

Use the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A/B jack to connect a subwoofer with a built-in power amplifier. If your subwoofer does not have a built-in amplifier, connect an amplifier to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A/B jack and the subwoofer to the amplifier.

You can connect two subwoofers for different speaker systems. You have to assign a subwoofer to the room in which it will be used (See pages 88, 89).

Connecting Auxiliary Power Amplifier (For Speaker System [A] only)

These jacks are for connecting an auxiliary power amplifier. The PRE OUT terminals on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E use the mode settings for speaker system [AI.

You can use an auxiliary power amplifier to listen at louder volumes than you can with the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E alone. When using a power amplifier, connect each speaker to the power amplifier.

1. Front left speaker 6. Surround back left 2. Front right speaker speaker 3. Center speaker 7. Surround back right 4. Surround left speaker

speaker 5. Surround right

Connecting Speakers —Continued

Using the BTL Connection

To get more powerful sound output, you can make the BTL (Bridged Transless) connection using the front and surround back speaker terminals on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. In this connection, two speaker outputs of the stereo amplifier will be used as mono output by combining the individual stereo channel outputs, allowing you to get about twice the output.

When using the BTL connection, make sure that the speaker impedance is 8 ohm or higher.

For the settings on the BTL connection, see pages 88, 89.

CHROIIE In the BTL connection, the (—) L/R speaker terminals on

1. Connect the (+) terminal on the right speaker to the FRONT R SPEAKERS (+) terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and the (—) terminal on the right speaker to the SURR BACK R SPEAKERS (+) terminal on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

2. Connect the (+) terminal on the left speaker to the FRONT L SPEAKERS (+) terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and the (—) terminal on the left speaker to the SURR BACK L SPEAKERS (+) terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E.

Using Bi-amp Connection

When you use bi-wiring-enabled speakers for the front speakers, you can make the bi-amp connection. In this connection, the front and surround back speaker terminals will be used for tweeter and woofer, respectively. This connection allows you to obtain high quality sound as well as maximum treble and bass performance from the tweeter and woofer, enriching your sound experience.

When making the bi-amp connection, make sure

10 remove the shorting bars connecting the high

range (Twecter) and low range (Woofer)

+ When using the bi-amp connection, make sure that the speaker impedance is 8 ohm or higher.

For the settings on the bi-amp connection, see pages 88,

Bi-wiring-enabled speakers Right speaker Left speaker

This chapter explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.

FM antenna connector —

AM antenna push terminals —

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna

The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use only.

{ Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting the tabs into the base, as shown.

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna

The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

1 Attach the FM antenna, as shown. M USA and Canadian Model

Insert the plug fully into the socket.

Insert the plug fully into the socket

Once your TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is ready for use, you’Il need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust the position of the FM antenna 10 achieve the best possible reception.

2 Use thumbtacks or something similar to fix the FM antenna into position.

2 Connect both wires of the AM loop antenna to the AM push terminals, as shown.

(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so they can be connected in either terminal)

Make sure that the wires are attached securely and that the push terminals are gripping the bare wires, not the insulation.

Le > D ES LS ush lsert wire Release

Once your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is ready for use, you’1l need to tune into an AM radio Station and adjust the position of the AM antenna 10 achieve the best possible reception. Keep the antenna as far away as possible from your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.

Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself when using thumbtacks.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using a commercially available outdoor AM antenna.

Connecting Antennas—Continued

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.

Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but acceptable results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an attic or loft

For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line of sight 10 your local FM transmitter.

Outdoor antennas should be located away from possible noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, et For safety reasons, outdoor antennas should be situated well away from power lines and other high voltage equipment Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with local regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter

Is best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as shown.

TV/FM antenna splitter

To AV receiver To TV (or VCR)

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna

If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.

Outdoor antenna (aerial)

Insulated antenna cable AM loop antenna =

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained indoors by mounting it horizontally above a window. Note that the AM loop antenna should be left connected. Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with local regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Connecting AV Components

Types of Connection Cables and Terminals

In addition to the conventional terminals, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E has various terminals that are capable of next- generation digital transmission.

Before connecting AV components to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make sure that your cable type matches the ter- minal shape and the signal type and that the cable length is appropriate for the placement of your connected components. Audio cables

Cable names Cable forms Terminals shapes Description

Optical cable The connection using these cable types trans- mits digital audio signals. There is no sound quality difference among these cable types. Note:

Some optical cables have their own covers. Before making a connection, remove the cov- ers. When plugging in a cable, be sure to match the connector shape with the terminal shape. Each optical terminal on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E has its own shutter-type cover. For the TX-NR1000/TX-NR6000E, plug in the optical cables so that the optical cable connec- tor pushes the terminal cover down.

Audio connection ave This connection transmits an analog audio sig-

cable > — ln. nal. Plug the red connector (R) into the right

channel terminal and the white connector (L) into the left channel connector.

The terminals for this cable type are for DVD players that are compatible with the DVD-Audio format. This connection transmits multichannel analog audio signals.

i.LINK (AUDIO) con- This connection can be used for connecting nection cable i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled devices and to transmit {4-pin (5400) type) digital audio signals. Also, multichannel analog audio signals from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD format sources will be transmitted digitally. The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E handies only audio signals through i.LINK connection.

Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is used for connecting multi- (CAT:5 Straight mer ple PCs or network-ready audio components

type) mes that constitute a local area network (LAN). A LAN is a smaller network composed within a house or building. The connecting terminals for the Ethernet cables are often called ‘LAN port” or‘broadband port”

*The audio input signal from the ETHERNET (Net-Tune) or MULTI-CH IN terminal will not be output to the HDMI OUT terminal. Also, the DVD audio or SACD audio input signal from the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal will not be output 10 the HDMI OUT terminal.

When you play a source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the following restrictions are applied.

When you play the audio signal from Super Audio CD or DVD-Audio format sources through the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, the audio input signal from these sources will not be output to Zone 2 or Zone 3. With this connection, you cannot record from these sources.

When you play the audio signal from the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface in Zone 3, only the PCM signal will be output as an analog source to the AUDIO OUT terminals. Similarly, with this connection, you can record only the PCM sig- nal as an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.

The audio input signal from the LAN port will be output only to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source. When you play the audio signal from the PH or AUDIO IN terminals in Zone 3, the input source will be output only to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source. Similarly, in this connection, you can record only the audio signal as an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 2, the source will be downmixed into 2- channel analog audio signal and output to the AUDIO OUT terminals.

When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 3, only the PCM signal will be output as an analog source to the AUDIO OUT terminals. Similarly, with this connection, you can record only the PCM signal as an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.

+ The audio input signal from the HDMI IN terminal can be output to the HDMI OUT terminal.

+ The audio input signal from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 2 will be downmixed into a 2-channel source for output. You cannot play the source from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 3 and record it.

Cable names Cable forms Terminals shapes Description

Component video connection cable

(RCA type) n v * pa Pa où In this connection, the video signal is decom- a m posed into three color difference signals (Ÿ, Pb/ Oo Cb, and Pr/Cr) and carried through three © cables, which provides better video quality than

the S Video connection. ‘The terminal shape for the component video Component video connection cable can be BNC-type or RCA- connection cable type. For the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, the US

(BNC type) model is equipped only with RCA-type termi- x v nals, and the other models are equipped with mu mo both RCA-type and BNC-type terminals.

This connection cannot transmit information for ma ma controlling video devices (e.g. aspect ratio).

S Video connection The video quality is better than with the com-

cable posite signal. In this connection, the

BL — TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E cannot transmit the information for controlling video devices (e.g., aspect ratio).

Video connection This connection transmits the standard video

D — + signal and is widely used for various video devices such as TV and video recorder.

HDMI connection Ham This connection carries the video signals digi-

{Note that no audio signal is carried with this unit.) Note:

When you play the source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), connect the TV or monitor to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.

+ Always refer to the instructions that came with the component that you are connecting. + Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been properly made. +_ Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Improper connections can result in noise, poor performance, or damage to the equipment. Example: Audio connection cable

+ Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables. Doing so may adversely affect the picture and sound quality.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

This section describes the connections for displaying the video source or the operating information of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E on a monitor device such as a TV or projector. Before making a connection, check the terminal types on the monitor device and acquire the necessary cables by referring to page 31.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E incorporates a video converter, which allows you to enjoy the video source even when the connections between the playback device and the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and between the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and the monitors are different. When your TV or monitor has various types of input ter- minals, use the connection with which you can get the best video quality (For a model with no HDMI terminal, note that the input signal from the COMPONENT terminal will be output only to the COMPONENT terminal).

The VIDEO OUT 4 and $ VIDEO OUT 4 terminals can be used only for Main room A.

When you enjoy the video source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the TV or monitor should be connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.

“For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connecting a DVD Player

+ When connecting a DVD player to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.

When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from a DVD player or operate your RI-compatible Onkyo products via RI connections between the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the audio output terminals on the DVD player to the AUDIO IN terminals on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).

This section shows the connection example when you use the default settings of the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E. However, you can connect a DVD player to other terminals within the same terminal section on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. In such case, remember to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94) and the video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD player to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminal to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

DVD player When connecting to other audio terminals When connecting to other video terminals within the same terminal section, configure within the same terminal section, configure the audio input settings accordingly using the the video input settings accordingly using the Audio Assign sub-menu. (See page 94.) Video Assign sub-menu. (See page 95.)

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR (VIDEO 1)

+ When connecting a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct con- nections.

This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 1 as an input. In this case, you do not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E, configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94), the video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 95), the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 91), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 92).

You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 97).

When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from the digital device, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the audio output terminals on the digital device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).

For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the COMPONENT ter- minals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 1 as input

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3)

When connecting a VCR to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections for video and audio signals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.

This section shows the connection example when you use VIDEO 2 or VIDEO 3 as an input. In this case, you do not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94), the video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 95), the audio output assignment in the Audio Out- put Assign menu (See page 91), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign menu (See page 92). You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 97).

For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a VCR to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

“For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 2 as input

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 3 as input

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT SVDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DIGITAL ANALOG AL DCR For digital * VCR

*European and Asian models use the BNC type component terminals, and other models use the RCA type.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS Tuner

When connecting a DBS tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS tuner to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.

This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 4 or VIDEO 5 as an input. In this case, you do not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, remember to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94) and the video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 95). When you use the S VIDEO terminal for connection, you should configure the Video Assign sub-menu.

You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 97).

For a model without a slot for the HDMI terminal, when you connect a BS/CS tuner or LD player to the COMPO- NENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 4 as input

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT F L AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL COANIAL.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 5 as input

Connecting AV Components—Continued

Connecting a Portable DVD Player or Video Camcorder

+ When connecting a portable DVD player or video

+ You can change the display name for the input source

camcorder to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E, use the

VIDEO 7 INPUT terminals on the front 1. erminals on the front panel Game, Portable DVD,

U Video Camcorder 10 represent the actual connected device (See page

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL ANALOG VIDEO SVIDEO OPTICAL OUT OUT Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner

When connecting a CD player to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections using digital or analog termi- nals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections. This section shows the connection exam- ple when you use the default audio input assignment settings. However, when you use coaxial cables for digital audio signals, connect the CD player to any terminal between the AUDIO IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 1 and 6, and remember to configure the audio input assignment settings in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94).

When connecting a turntable, use the PH terminal. The PH terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is designed for turntables that use a moving magnet (MM) cartridge. When you want to use a turntable with a moving coil (MC) cartridge, connect the turntable through a step-up transformer or head amplifier.

If you assign other terminals to the PHONO input source, you need to configure the audio input assignment settings in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94).

When a turntable is equipped with a ground wire, connect the wire to the GND terminal on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. However, some turntables may produce noise when the ground wire is connected to the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. In such a case, you do not have to connect the ground wire.

When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal or operate your RI-compatible Onkyo products via RI connections between the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Con- nect the audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL ANALOG OPTICAL When connecting to other audio terminals within the same terminal section, configure the audio input set- tings accordingly using the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 94).

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connecting a Recording Device such as MD Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder or Cassette Deck

+ When connecting a MD recorder, DAT deck or CD recorder to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, make connections using digital or analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.

Connect à cassette or DAT tape deck to TAPEI, and an MD or CD recorder to TAPE 2.

When you connect a cassette deck to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, be sure to use only analog audio terminals. In the initial settings, no terminal of this unit is assigned to a REC terminal of the cassette deck, To achieve the assign- ment, connect the REC terminal of the cassette deck to any of the AUDIO OUT 1 to 5 terminals and set the terminal to “Tape 1 Rec Out” in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 91). In addition, you can switch the input source “TAPE2” to MD or CDR. Press the [TAPE 2] button on the front panel to display “TAPE 2,” then press the [TAPE 2] button again and hold it for 3 seconds. This changes the display to “MD” If you wish to change it to “CDR” release the button once, and press and hold it again for 3 seconds. This operation enables you to operate Onkyo’s MD or CD recorders with the remote controller of this unit (Please note that the RI connection is required).

When connecting Lo other terminals, remember to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub- menu (See page 94) and the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 91).

You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 97). When you want to perform analog recording of an audio signal or operate your RI-compatible Onkyo products via Rl connections between the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Con- nect the audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).

Example for connecting with the TAPE 1 as input

Cassette deck or DAT deck

AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT ANALOG.

DIGITAL DIGITAL OPTICAL OPTICAL.

ÆExample for connecting to the TAPE 2 as input

Connecting AV Components—Continued

Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO) Terminal ( à ) (Other than Chinese model) What is i LINK

i LINK is an appellation of IEEE1394, which is the digital interface standard defined by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

Connecting i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported devices allows high speed transfer of data such as digital sound between the linked devices, and their control.

What is i.LINK (AUDIO)

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E supports “.LINK (AUDIO)" of the i.LINK transfer format. Accordingly, “LINK

(AUDIO)” must also be supported for other devices that you want to connect to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E does not support other i.LINK transfer formats such as “MPEG-2 TS” used for BS digital

broadcasts or “DV” used for DVD recorders, digital video, etc. The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E connected to other

i.LINK(AUDIO)-supported devices via i.LINK cable enables you to transfer multichannel digital sound such as DVD-

Audio and SACD (video signal is not supported).

Even when multiple devices are connected to each other, you can perform data transfer and control of target devices via

The IEEE interfaces on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E are designed conforming to the standards below.

1. IEEE Std 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus

2. 1EC60958 bitstream, DVD-Audio, and SACD in the AM824 Sequence adaptation layers of Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.0

Copyright Protection System

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E supports the DTCP (Digital Transmission Contents Protection) system. The DTCP system uses technologies for data encryption and authentication during the data transfer between the i.LINK-con-

nected digital devices in order to protect the copyright of the content against illegal duplication. To enjoy replaying DVD-Audio, etc., the DTCP must also be supported by other devices connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

How to Make a Connection through the i.LINK (AUDIO) Interface

Use the S400 4-pin i.LINK (AUDIO) cable to connect the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E to the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled device.

+ The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E supports only audio signal transmission through the i. LINK (AUDIO) interface. When connecting video devices, you need to make a connection using other terminals for video signal.

If any other Onkyo product is connected to the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E via i.LINK, system operation can be achieved via i.LINK cable. In that case, disconnect the R1 connection as it may introduce errors.

VIDEO OUT In addition to the i.LINK audio connection, make sure to connect

| the terminals for images such as VIDEO and/or S VIDEO terminals.

\ — Connecting AV Components —Continued Interconnection of i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported Devices The i.LINK connection allows for data transfer, even if the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is connected to other devices via another i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported device. You can connect up to 17 devices in a daisy chain (in-line) connection arrangement using the i.LINK connection. Example: TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E K ready DVD player _i.LINK-ready BS tuner [ | [5 = 55 | JS Soc} . up to 17 devices = | For devices in a branched connection arrangement, you can connect up to 63, as long as they have three or more i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals. Example: TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E A iLINK-ready DVD player _ i.LINK-ready BS tuner de RE … up to 63 devices i.LINK-ready MD recorder Be sure to avoid the looped connection arrangement of devices as shown below. The output signals should not be returned to the original signal output device, which may cause device failure. _ KP LINK (AUDIO)-ready i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device device | = Dose Ge © Self ER j Soce [ 1 | LINK (AUDIO)-ready i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device device

a SR EE] ready device

+ Do not connect any devices that do not support i.LINK (AUDIO), such as “MPEG-2 TS” ready devices used for BS digital broadcasts and “DV” ready devices used for digital video, etc. Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cable to or from other devices, connect additional devices, or turn them on/off while any i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device is playing. Otherwise, the audio sound may be interrupted. Some i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices cannot transfer data when the power mode is set to standby or off. Refer to the individual User Manual of the i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device you want to connect. i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices have their own maximum data transfer rate: either $100 (100 Mbps*), 8200 (200 Mbps*) or S400 (400 Mbps*). The rate label is located near the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals. The TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E has a maximum data transfer rate of 400 Mbps. However, this may decrease depending on the specifi- cations or the maximum data transfer rate of devices connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSOO0E. It is recom- mended to connect devices with the same maximum data transfer rate.

“Mbps” stands for “mega bits per second” which indicates the maximum data size transferred per second. For example, 400 Mbps indicates that 400 mega bits of data can be transferred every second The i.LINK feature does not assure successful connectivity between all i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices. Successful data transfer and control signal communications depend on the individual features of each device.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

How to Configure i.LINK Connections

Selecting a Device When the i.LINK connection is ready, you can use the setup menu to select any device which is connected via i.LINK. Once you have configured the i.LINK setting, the next time you select the input source, it will be selected as the play- ing source. Using Remote Control 1. Press the [INPUT] button, and then turn the scroll wheel to select any source for setting. 2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [SETUP] button. 3. Use the [ A V/[ Y ] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [ENTER] button. 4. Use the [ À JA W] buttons to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the [ENTER] button. 5. Use the [ À JA W] buttons to select “g. i. LINK” 6. Use the [-@J/[B-] buttons to select any device. If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.” Using Control Buttons on TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E 1. Select any input source, and then press the [SETUP] button. 2. Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Input Setup,” and then press the dial. 3. Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the dial. 4. Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “e. i.LINK," and then press the dial. 5. Turn the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial to select any device. If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.”

Using Useful Functions While the i.LINK Connection is Ready

If any other Onkyo product is connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via i.LINK and assigned as a input source (Audio Assign), you can use the following functions. The I connection must be disconnected to use them.

LINK Selector Change

When the i.LINK-connected device starts playing, the input source will automatically be changed to the one assigned to the device even if another input source has been selected. See page 120 for detailed operations.

You cannot hear audio sound of i.LINK-connected devices in Zone 2.

Control of DVD Player

You can control a DVD player by emitting signals from the remote controller to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Auto Start (Wakeup Setup)

While the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is in standby mode, you can configure the setting of any i.LINK-connected device. See page 120 for detailed operations.

OSD for DVD If DVD player is connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via i.LINK, you can output the OSD of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E on a TV, even if a DVD player is directly connected to the TV. You can configure the set- ting to specify the display area on the TV, for example, right or left side of the screen. When multiple devices are con- nected, you can select any specific device through which the output is sent. This function is also available in Zone 2. See page 120 for detailed operations.

While the Intelligent Monitor is used, do not change mode to standby, nor turn on/off the player.

DVD Output Synchronization

You can select on/off of the i.LINK (AUDIO) output of a DVD player from the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. See page 120 for detailed operations.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connection Using HDMI Terminals About the HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)

The High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is an interface standard for next-generation TV, designed to connect between STB (Set Top Box) and display digitally in the home, responding to technological changes such as digitaliza- tion of TV broadcasting.

In addition to the existing features provided by the Digital Visual Interface (DV1)"! standard, HDMI allows transmission of both audio and control signals. Moreover, multiple cables are required for video, audio, and control signals in con- ventional connections, but the HDMI interface allows you to make a connection through a single HDMI cable, thus enabling transfer of digital video and sound data between HDMI-supported devices.

In principle, the HDMI video stream (video signals) is compatible with the DVI. You can use the HDMI-DVI conversion cables to connect with TVs or monitors that are outfitted with DVI terminals, though video images may not be visible depending on the combination of devices. The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E uses HDCP; you can enjoy pictures on HDCP ready monitors.

The HDMI interfaces on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E are designed to conform to the standards below. High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.0

Copyright Protection System

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E supports High-bandwidih Digital Contents Protection (HDCP)?, technology to pro- tect copyright of digital video signals against illegal duplication. HDCP must also be supported on the devices con- nected 10 the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Use the HDMI cable supplied with the product or those from the marketplace to connect the HDMI OUT terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E with the HDMI input terminals on TVS or monitors.

#1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by DDWG3 in 1999.

#2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection): The video data encryption technology for DVI developed by Intel. This technology is designed to protect the video content and a HDCP-compliant DVI receiver is required to play the encrypted video content.

+3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): The standardization group for digital interface for display, operated mainly by Intel, Silicon Image, FUJITSU, and Hewlett-Packard (Compaq Computer).

How to Make a Connection through the HDMI Interface

Use the HDMI cable to connect the HDMI terminals on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E and on an HDMI-enabled

device such as a DVD player, TV, or projector.

Set HDMI to 1 or 2 in the Video Assign sub-menu according to the connected device you wish to use. In the initial

settings, 1 is assigned to DVD, and 2 to Video 1.

Basically, the HDMI can transmit audio signals. However in order to playback the audio signal with the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E, make a separate digital connection with a DVD player or other devices, since the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E cannot playback any audio signals supplied from its HDMI IN 1/2 terminals.

+ When other input source than or 2 is selected, analog/digital audio signals and analog video signals will be con- verted into the HDMI format and output through the HDMI OUT terminal (In the initial settings, no audio signal is output. Appropriate setting should be made in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu).

+ Analog audio signals will be output in the PCM format. Digital audio signals will be output through the HDMI OUT terminal only if the connected TV or projector can playback the digital audio signals.

A TV or projector that supports PCM audio signals only, for example, cannot playback audio signals in the Dolby Digital format supplied as an input source to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. In order to properly playback the audio signals in this case, the player should be configured to output the PCM signals.

When an analog audio connection is made on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS0O00E, analog audio signal is output in the PCM format.

Connecting AV Components —Continued

Connection example when the source selection is performed on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Connection example for higher video quality

To enable HDMI audio output of the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E from the TV speakers, enable HDMI Out according to “HDMI Out” on page 92.

When connecting an AV component equipped with the HDMI input terminal, you can use the connecting layout shown below. Before making a connection, read the instruction manual of the connected device thoroughly.

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Before making a connection, read the DVD instruction manual thoroughly.

NA SA Connecting Components not Reached by the Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)

In order to use the remote controller to control the

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E from a remote location,

you will need to prepare a multiroom kit (sold sepa-

rately) such as one listed below:

+ Onkyo’s Multi-Room System kits (IR Remote Con- troller Extension System)

+ Multiroom A/V distribution and control system such as those from Niles® and Xantech®

RF Receivers can also be used with the remote controller

10 control the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E from a remote

location. To use RF Receivers, set the Transmission Sig-

nal Format setting to “RF” (See page 141 for details).

If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Remote Sensor

Effective Sensor Layout

Example for the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3) The IR IN input allows you to control the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E from the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3) with the remote controller even though the remote zone may be on the other side of the building from the main zone. The diagram below shows how to make the proper connections for the remote zone.

ToIRIN_ 2 = 1 Tir Receiver

TX-NR5000E Connecting block

Main room Zone 2/Zone 3 room

Example for the main room If the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is located inside a cabinet or other enclosure where the infrared rays from the remote controller cannot enter, then operation with the remote controller will not be possible. In such a case, it will be necessary 10 install a remote sensor at a location outside of the cabinet so that the infrared rays from the controller can be sensed.

near 2 1 ReceIMer Ÿ fu iRIN —| TENR 10007 TENR Remote controller 5000E In the cabinet Main room

Making Sensor Connections

When you place the IR receiver in the main room, connect the cable from the connecting block to the IR IN MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly. Make the connection as shown below. Do not plug any equipment into the power outlet until all the connections are complete.

from connecting block

Mini plug cable al TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E

Connecting Components not Reached by the Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)—Continued

If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach Other Components

Effective Sensor Layout

In this situation, you will need to use a commercially available IR emitter. Connect the mini plug of the IR emitter to the IR OUT terminal on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E and then place the IR emitter on the remote sensor of the component or facing it. When the IR emitter is connected, only the signal input to the IR IN terminal is output to the IR OUT terminal. The sig- nal input from the remote sensor on the front of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E will not be output to the IR OUT terminal.

D { Connecting M'Recelver, block

Making Sensor Connections

When you place the IR receiver in the main room, con- nect the cable from the connecting block to the IR OUT MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting

block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly.

Other component 2: Signal flow Remote control TT sensor Mini plug Emitter =] <a IR Emitter

TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E

Using an External Device with 12V Trigger Terminal

You can automatically turn on the connected AV com- ponents with the output signal from the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E’s 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal.

Connect the 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E to the 12V TRIGGER IN terminal on other components. Every 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal can be connected to the components whether they are placed in the main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E has five 12V TRIG- GER OUT terminals and the maximum currents to be connected are as follows:

A: 200 mA B, C, D and E: 100 mA After making connections, configure the association between the room (zone) and the component to be turned on (Refer to “12V Trigger Assign” under “Input Setup” on page 98).

The RI terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is for connecting other Onkyo components equipped with the same RI terminal. When a component is connected 10 the MI terminal, it can be operated by the remote controller supplied with the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. In addition, when you connect a component to the RRI terminal, you can also perform the system operations given below.

Power on/ready function

When the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is in the standby state, if an RRI-connected component is turned on, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E also turns on and the input source selected at the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E automatically switches to that component.

Be aware that this function will not work if the power cord for the RI-connected component is connected to the AC OUTLET on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, or if the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E has already been turned on. Direct change function

When the play button is pressed on an RI-connected component, the input source selected at the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E automatically changes to that component.

When the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is placed in the standby state, all RI-connected components are also automatically put into the standby state.

Also, if you press the [ON] button on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E remote controller while the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E is turned on, all RI-connected components (DVD players, CD players, MD recorders, tuners, etc.) are also turned on.

Onkyo DVD player ET Hamote control p cable

Connections for Remote Control (R1)

To connect components using the I terminal, simply

connect a remote control cable from this RI terminal to

the R l terminal of the other component. An RI remote control cable with a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) miniature two- conductor plug comes with every cassette tape deck, compact disc player, MD recorder, and DVD player that has an RI terminal.

+ When performing operations with Rl-connected components using the I system, do not use the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone3).

+_ For remote control operation, the audio connection

cables must also be connected.

If a component has two MI terminals, you can use

either one to connect to the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E. The other one can be used to daisy

chain with another component.

With Onkyo DVD players, you can enter the pre-

program code so that you can operate the DVD player

directly with the remote controller without connecting

the RI terminals (See page 129).

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons

The remote controller supplied with the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO000E is a multifunctional remote controller, so you can operate not only the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E but also AV components connected to the apparatus and components placed in another room. The basic operations are explained here. It is recommended that you read and understand this page before starting actual operations. This explanation focuses on remote controller operations.

To Operate the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E (AMP Mode)

î Press the scroll wheel.

Indication on the lower line changes to AMP.

2 Whenthe remote controller is in AMP mode, the following functions are available:

ON/STANDBY: Press to set power on/standby. MAIN A: Used when driving the speaker that has been set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

SLEEP MAIN B: Used when driving the speaker that

has been set 10 “Main B” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

ENTER/ RETURN/ Cursor

Alvi@» || © GE © MAIN A/

SURR, THX;— ALL ST, STEREO, PURE À, DIRECT, DSP 4/>

RC-557M RC-558M To Select an Input Source

MUTING: Used to temporarily turn off the sound immediatedly.

L NIGHT: Used when switching the dynamic range. Re-EQ: Used when applying the Re-EQ effect.

{ Press the [INPUT] button. The [INPUT] button lights.

2 Rollthe scroll wheel.

Indication on the upper line changes.

When you perform the procedures on the TX-NR 1000/

S) (EE INPUT TX-NR5000E, use the input source buttons on the front panel.

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons—Continued

To Operate a Connected Component (Mode Switching)

1 Press the [MODE] button. The [MODE] button lights.

2 Rollthe scroll wheel.

Indication on the lower line changes to indicate the selected component mode.

Before operating the connected component, follow the instructions on pages 124 through 133 to make appropriate settings using the remote controller.

—_{, > à Scroll wheel croi wneer TX-NRS000E, press the [ZONE 2] (or [REC/ZONE 3). and turn the [SELECT/PRESET] (or [CONTROL/ TUNING]. To Perform a Macro Operation Before performing the following procedure, complete your macro settings (See page 137). { Press the [MACRO] button. The [MACRO] button lights. 2 Rollthe scroll wheel to select the macro's number, and then press the scroll wheel. MACRO Scroll wheel Customizing Your Remote Controller Use the [CUSTOM] button “to enter the remote controller code for another apparatus to this remote controller,” “to make this remote controller learn specified operations from the remote controller for another apparatus,” or “to make this remote controller learn a series of operations with macro functions” according to the configuration you are using. For detailed information, see pages 136-142. k 49 À

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

+ Before you plug in the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, confirm that all connections have been made properly. + Turning on the power may cause a momentary power surge, which might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same circuit, such as computers. If this happens, use a wall outlet on a different circuit.

(AI models other than USA, Canadian, and Australian models)

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO0O0E is

shipped with the main power (POWER) switch in the on position (_m. ON ). When

the power cord is plugged in for the first time, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E will automatically enter the standby

state and the [STANDBY] indicator will

STANDBY/ON Input source buttons STANDBY indicator | MASTER VOLUME

light (same condition after step 2 below on the left coloumn).

STANDBY/ON Input source buttons

STANDBY indicator | MASTER VOLUME D — To wall out —

(USA, Canadian, and Australian models)

Turning on the Power

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

(USA, Canadian, and Australian models)

The [STANDBY] indicator will light up.

(Other models) Press the [POWER] switch to set the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to standby state.

The [STANDBY] indicator will light up.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] button to turn on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

The display will light up and the [STANDBY] indicator will turn off.

If you press the [STANDB Y/ON] button again, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E returns to the standby state.

Any components connected via I will also be turned

on when the remote controller’s [ON] button is pressed.

Press the input source button. @& * You cannot listen to a source in main {& room À, and to another source in main

2 Start playing the device selected. When playing a picture device such as a DVD player, you need to switch input to a monitor such a TV set. Some picture-playing devices such as a DVD-type game machine may also require setting of sound output. Refer to the manual of the device connected.

3 Adjust the volume level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

You can adjust the volume level in the range from —c, -81.5 dB to 18.0 dB (Max) (when Relative is selected in the Volume Setup sub-menu).

TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is a product for users to enjoy home theater, so it is equipped with a wide range of volume levels. Please fine tune the volume level according to your preferences.

SA Connecting the Power/Basic Operations —Continued

Ï cie AIS STANDBY 28.0 Scroll wheel MODE INPUT VOL LA MAIN A MAIN B 286

RC-557M RC-558M Turning on the Power from the Remote Controller

Before you can use the remote controller, you must perform steps 1 and 2 in the “Turning on the Power” section and place the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E in the standby state.

1 Press the scroll wheel.

controlling the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

“AMP” appears on the remote EN controller’ display. This is the mode for

Press the [ON] button to turn on on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

To set the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to ù Standby, press the [STANDBY] button.

Operating with Remote Controller

1 Press the button for the room where you want to play your device.

Mana ans MAIN A: Switches to operations in main room A.

MAIN B: Switches to operations in main room B.

When MAIN A or MAIN B is selected, the indicator on the front display of the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E lights.

If the mode is already effective, you do not need to press. If you press this but- ton, the mode is made becomes ineffec- tive.

The speaker set in the Speaker/Output Setup menu sounds in the room selected.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a device to play.

Carry out this operation when neither the [MODE] button nor the [INPUT] button lights. If any button lights, press it to turn it off.

Rolling the scroll wheel lights both but- tons, and switches the input source and the mode at the same time.

3 Start playing the device selected. When playing a picture device such as a DVD player, you need to switch the input to a monitor such as TV set. Some picture-playing devices such as a DVD-type game machine may also require setting of sound output. Refer to the manual of the device connected.

4 Adjust the volume level with the [VOL 1/1] button.

You can adjust the volume level in the range from —c, -81.5 dB to 18.0 dB (Max) (when Relative is selected in the Volume Setup sub-menu).

Hi The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is a product for users to enjoy the home theater, so it is equipped with a wide range of volume levels. Please fine-tune the volume level according to you preferences.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations —Continued

Scroll EE ( DIMMER 53 ES © 2

3-7—-MUTING Listening with Headphones

To listen with headphones, plug a pair of headphones with a standard stereo plug into the PHONES jack on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E front panel.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Front Display

You can adjust the brightness of the front display of the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E using the [DIMMER] button on the remote controller or on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E front panel (other than European models).

TX-NR1000/ DENR5000€ VS the IDIMMER] button on the

n TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to select: normal, dark, very dark, and AN volume only. Remote controller On the remote controller, press the

scroll wheel, and then press the [DIMMER] button.

Temporarily Turning Off the Sound (remote controller only)

Use the [MUTING] button to temporarily turn off the sound immediately.

Press the scroll wheel, and then controller

press the [MUTING] button on the

remote controller. When pressed, “Muting” is displayed on

Ÿ the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Press the [MUTING] button again to turn the

When you connect headphones, no sound will be heard from the speakers.

While the Dolby Headphone feature is active, appears on the front display.

Refer to pages 58, 59, and 117.

The signal to the remote zone (Zone 2/3) will not be affected whether or not headphones are connected.

You can adjust bass, mid, and treble notes for each speaker set. You can also adjust the tone using the setup menu (see page 118).

1 Press the [TONE] button.

TX-NR5000E Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select the channel and tone you want to adjust.

Turn the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial to adjust the tone.

SA Connecting the Power/Basic Operations —Continued

Scroll wheel SLEEP CH SEL- LEVEL- LEVEL.

RC-557M RC-558M Using the Sleep Timer (remote controller only)

With the sleep timer you can set the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS5000E so that it automatically turns off after a set period.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [SLEEP] button repeat- edly to select the required sleep time.

You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10 minutes in 10 minute increments.

The [SLEEP] indicator appears on the display when the sleep timer has been set, as shown. The specified sleep time appears on the display for about five seconds, then the previous display reappears.

If you are using the remote zone (Zone 2 or 3), it will turn off at the same time as the main zone.

To cancel the sleep timer, press the ISLEEP] button repeatedly until the [SLEEP] indicator disappears.

To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP] button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while the sleep time is being displayed, you’1l shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.

Temporarily Changing the Speaker Output Levels (remote controller only)

To change the individual speaker volumes temporarily, follow the procedure given below. Each channel can be set between —-12 and +12 decibels (between —-15 and +12 decibels for the subwoofer). Note that the speaker volumes will return to the original settings when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is put in the standby state.

1 Press the scroll wheel to enter the AMP mode.

Press the [CH SEL] button and select the desired speaker.

Press the [LEVEL -] or [LEVEL +] (ce) button to adjust the volume level.

You cannot select a speaker if it is set to “Not Usec the Speaker Configuration Sub-menu of the Speaker/ Output Setup Menu.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations —Continued

000000 2 800008 e s ?? Z moecs — DISPLAY =] =] Scroll wheel æ leur © A DISPLAY — $&

RC-557M RC-558M Switching the Display

While listening to or watching an input source, you can display information regarding the type of source and sig- nal being input.

When an input source other than FM or AM is selected: Input — ji ir

* When the input signal is tal audio other than PCM The program format is displayed. For example, the dis- play “Dolby D: 3/2.1” shows that the format is Dolby Digital with 5.1 discrete channels consisting of three front channels (front left, front right, and center), two surround channels (surround left and surround right), and the low frequency effect (LFE) channel. When the front channel number is 2, they are the front left and front right; when it is 1, it is monaural. When the sur- round channel number is 1, it is monaural; when it is O, there is no surround channel. When no LFE number is given, there is no LFE channel. Also, if there is no program format for the input signal, nothing will be displayed.

When the input signal is linear PCM The sampling frequency is displayed. For example, the display “PCM fs: 44.1K” shows that the signal is PCM and that the sampling frequency is 44.1 KHz.

Dialog norm Dialogue Normalization (Dialog Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital. When playing back software that has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display that reads Dialog Norm xdB (“x” being a numeric value). Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the source material has been recorded at a higher or lower level than usual. For example, if you see the message “Dialog Norm: +4” in the front panel display, to keep the overall output level constant the output volume has been automatically decreased by 4 dB. In other words, the source material that you are listening to has been recorded 4 dB louder than usual.

When FM or AM is selected as the input source:

SA Connecting the Power/Basic Operations —Continued

Changing the Audio Mode

Using the Re-EQ Function

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E accepts analog, digital, LINK (AUDIO), and multichannel signals for audio input. You can choose the kind of signal to be played for a specific device. For Zone 2, the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E accepts only analog and digital signals for audio input.

1 Press the [INPUT] button, and then roll the scroll wheel to select the input source you want to set.

Press the scroll wheel and then press the [AUDIO SEL] button. Each time the button is pressed, the mode changes from “Auto” —> “Analog” “Multich”= “LINK” and back to “Auto.” The “Auto” audio mode is recommended for normal circumstances.

This procedure can also be performed by using the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Press the [AUDIO SELECTOR] button then use the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select the mode you want to set.

Auto (XXX) (automatic detection): With this setting, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E automatically detects whether the input signal is digital or analog. When a digital signal is not input, then the analog signal is played. This setting only appears if a digital input is selected for the Digital Input setting at Setup Menu — Input Setup Menu — Audio Assign Sub-menu — Digital Audio (See page 95). (XXX) displays the name of the assigned terminal.

Multich (Multichannel): Select this setting to play back the input from the component connected to the MULTI-CH IN 1/2 port. This setting only appears if “1°? or “2” is selected for the Multichannel setting at Setup Menu — Input Setup Menu — Audio Assign Sub- menu Multichannel (See page 94).

Analog: Select this setting to playback the input from a source component connected to analog audio input jacks. With this setting, even if a digital signal is input from the same component, only the analog signal will be output.

i.LINK: Select this setting to play back the input from a source component connected to the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal. With this setting, only the i.LINK signal will be output. This settings is available when any device is selected at Input Setup menu — Audio Assign Sub- menu — i.LINK.

This function corrects soundtracks with a strong treble level to the home theater level. This correction should be made when the treble sounds from the front speakers are 100 strong.

This can also be set on the menu with OSD. The listening mode which the Re-EQ effect can be applied to has a Re-EQ option in the Listening Mode Setup menu.

1 Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [Re-EQ] button (repeat-

Using the Late Night Function (only in Dolby Digital)

The difference between loud and quiet sounds is very large in pictures produced for movie theaters, so you have to raise the volume level to catch environmental sounds and human conversations. Since the Late Night Function is able to reduce the difference between loud and quiet sounds, you can hear quiet sounds without raising the entire volume level. This function is helpful when you enjoy movies late at night by turning down sounds.

This function is released when putting the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS5000E into the standby status.

This function can also be set on the menu with OSD (See page 106).

1 Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [L NIGHT] button EN (repeatedly).

Off: Turns off the Late Night function.

Ÿ Lo: ‘educes the difference between loud and quiet sounds.

High: Further reduces the difference between loud and quiet sounds.

The previous display comes back after a

+ The Late Night function is effective only for Dolby Digital sources.

+ The Late Night function may be less effective or have no effect depending on the Dolby Digital source.

Using the Listening Modes

Types of Listening Modes

Listening modes on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E enable you to enjoy movie theater or concert hall qual- ity sounds in your room. The TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E provides the following listening modes. Before playing a source in optimal sound, be sure to complete the Speaker/Output Setup (See pages 88 - 91).

This mode allows you to enjoy pure sounds straight from an original source, Every channel of the audio input source will be output “as is” to respective channels. Pure Audio

In addition to the Direct mode, playback of music more faithful to the original sounds is enabled because the display window is turned off to minimize noise sources (the power supply to the video circuitry is also turned off, so nothing is displayed on the screen).

Sounds are output from the right and left front speakers, and the subwoofer.

This mode is suitable for playing old movies recorded in monaural sound, or for playing the right and left channels separately on bilingual sources. This mode also allows you to listen to multiplexed soundtracks on DVDs and other sources.

Dolby Pro Logic II This mode enables 5.1-channel playback of music and movies recorded in 2 channels. You can select the Movie mode, best designed for playing movies, the Music mode, best designed for listening to music, and the Game mode, best suited for enjoying games. PLII Movie This mode can be used with VHS and DVD videos with the DO swvsmms] mark, and certain television programs. PLII Music This mode can be used with stereo music CDs and DVD recordings of live concerts. PLII Game This mode can be used with game discs. Dolby Pro Logic IIx This mode reproduces in 5.1-7.1 channels music CDs and movies recorded in 2 channels. Together with clearer sounds, you will hear more natural and smoother surround effects than ever before. In addition to CDs and movies, game sources are played with a dramatic spatial presentation and with sound localization. And this mode enables 7.1 channel playback of music and movies recorded in 5.1 channels. You can select the PLIIx Movie and PLIIxX Music mode. + PLIIx Movie

This is the best mode for viewing movies. + PLIIx Music

This is the best mode for playing music.

+ PLIIx Game This is the best mode for enjoying games, providing the best sense of signal movement. Dolby Digital This is a surround mode that will make you feel as if you are sitting in a seat inside a theater or concert hall. This mode can be used with DVDs and LDs with the

Dolby VS (Dolby Virtual Speaker)

The dynamic surround sound effects specific to 5.1 channel speakers are reproduced through 2 speakers. When combined with “Dolby Pro Logic I'/“DTS NEO:6;” this mode provides 5.1 channel surround music recorded in 2 channels on CD or MP3 through only 2 speakers. This mode can also be applied to a sys- tem equipped with more than 2 speakers.

If you are able to use only 2 speakers in a separate room (Zone 2 or Zone 3) or main room B, this mode will let you experience truly powerful sounds of a movie, CD or game through the virtual surround effects. When you use this mode with three or more speakers, the speakers used for output will depend on the input source and decoding mode.

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music or movies recorded in 5.1 channels. Adding a surround channel to the backside of 5.1 channel speakers to make them 6.1 channel speakers will enhance space expres- sions that should give you a real feel of moving sounds such as 360-degree rotation or overhead flying. Since sounds on the surround back channel are divided into the surround left and right channels, this mode also enables conventional 5.1 channel playback. When play- ing DVDs and LDs recorded in 5.1 channels with the

B## mark, Dolby Digital EX mode turns on, and when playing other sources, Dolby EX turns on.

DTS Sound data that would be of tremendous size if com- pletely divided into 5.1 channels are compressed into digital data with a status as close as possible to the orig- inal sounds. Playing in this mode requires a DVD player able to output DTS. This mode can be used with CDs, DVDs and LDs with the É# mark.

This is a listening mode available with DTS 96/24. This mode allows you to enjoy delicate sounds.

This is a 6.1 channel surround system based on DTS with a surround back channel added. Since all 6.1 chan- nels including the added surround back channel are recorded as completely independent digital data, a 3-D feeling and a sense of moving sounds are reproduced more clearly. This mode can be used with CDs, DVDs,

and LDs with the ETES mark.

Using the Listening Modes —Continued

DTS-ES Matrix This mode plays in 6.1 channels the music and movies recorded in DTS-ES. Sources recorded in DTS-ES include data for the surround back channel, and each channel is reproduced in 6.1 channels. This mode can

be used with CDs, DVDs, and LDs with the EME mark.

This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music and movies recorded in 2 channels. A broad frequency band is allocated to each channel, and every channel is kept very independent. This mode can be set to the Cinema mode, best designed for playing movies, and the Music mode, best designed for listening to music.

The sources recorded in 5.1 channels are played in NEO:6.

Surround effects full of moving sound feelings are reproduced. This mode is suitable for 2 channel recorded VHS videos, DVD videos, and television programs.

Since it uses a surround channel, this mode creates a natural sound field, which cannot be expected from ordinary 2 channel output. This mode is suitable for playing CDs recorded in 2 channels.

AAC Digital data compressed through the MPEG-2 AAC sys- tem reproduces surround sounds of 5.1 channels at maximum, This mode can be used for playing AAC sources such as a BS-digital-broadcasted program. Muitiplex

This mode is used for listening to multiplex broadcasts.

THX This mode produces the maximum effects on a THX- compliant speaker system.

This is a 5.1 channel THX mode, designed for view- ing theatrical films recorded and edited on the assumption that they will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater. The audio output for the sur- round back channels depends on the input source and decoding mode.

This is the THX Ultra 2 mode. This mode enables 7.1 channel playback of music and movies recorded in 5.1 channels. It analyzes surround factors to be repro- duced, and distributes the factors to the surround back to optimize the atmosphere and the sense of orienta- tion. This function reinforces the horizontal and back- ward extension, and the sound location.

This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing music sources. It enables 7.1 channel playback of 5.1 channel recorded sources.

+ THX Games Mode This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing game sources. THX Surround EX “THX Surround EX” - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Lid. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra surround back channel which has been added during the mixing of the pro- gram. À list of Surround EX encoded movies can be found on www.Dolby.com. + Multichannel This is a listening mode available with analog multi- channel connection. +_i. LINK: DVD-Audio This is a listening mode used for playing DVD-Audio format sources during i. LINK (AUDIO) connection. +_i. LINK: SACD This is a listening mode used for playing Super Audio CD format sources during i.LINK (AUDIO) connec- tion.

Onkyo's Proprietary Listening Mode (DSP)

This mode is useful for playing music as BGM. Stereo sounds are provided by all speakers, so you can enjoy a powerful sound field.

Monaural sounds are provided by all speakers. You can listen to the same tone of music wherever you are. Mono Movie

This mode is suitable for playing old movies recoreded in with monaural sound. The center channel outputs Straight sounds, while other speakers provide center sounds with adequate echo effects. Despite monaural sound, you can enjoy the feeling of being in a movie the- ater.

This mode is suitable for playig music, and watching sports programs on television. Environmental sounds are move naturally to the surround and surround back speakers, so more dynamic sounds are reproduced. Orchestra

This mode is suitable for playing classical music and operas. The surround effects are reinforced to extend the sound image throughout the listening room. You can enjoy the natural touch of music as if you are sitting in a large concert hall.

This mode is suitable for listening to acoustic sounds, vocals and jazz music. Because it focuses on the front sound image, this mode creates an image of the sound field that makes you feel as if you are listening to music in front of a stage.

Using the Listening Modes —Continued

TV Logic This mode is suitable for television programs broadcast from studios. You may feel as if you are sitting in a tele- vision studio. All of the surround sounds are enhanced,

and conversations are output clearly.

Listening Modes for Listeners Using Headphones

This mode makes headphones reproduce dynamic sur-

round sound effects like 5.1 channel speakers. The

tening mode used before putting on headphones is

applied to the headphones. However, the following lis-

tening modes will be decoded as follows:

+ The Dolby VS or Stereo mode sources will be decoded in the Dolby Headphone mode.

+ The source decoded in the 7.1ch surround format will be decoded in the 5.1ch surround format.

+ The DTS 96/24 mode source will be decoded in the DTS format.

Listening modes when the Dolby Headphone is set to

‘When the listening mode was Direct before putting on

headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the same

as the Direct mode indicated previously.

When the listening mode was Pure Audio before putting

on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the

same as the Pure Audio indicated previously.

‘When the listening mode was Mono, Mono Movie or

Full Mono before putting on headphones, this mode is

applied. Effects are the same as the Mono mode indi-

This mode is also applied when you listen to the monau-

ral source in the Dolby VS listening mode before put-

‘When the listening mode was other than Direct, Pure

Audio, Mono, Mono Movie or Full Mono before put-

ting on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the

same as the Stereo mode indicated previously.

When the listening mode was Multiplex before putting

on headphones, this mode is applied.

SA Using the Listening Modes —Continued

Selecting the Listening Mode

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E provides various listen- ing modes.

The available modes depend on the input signal you selected.

JT LISTENING MODE SELECT/PRESET INPUT Scroll wheel

RC-557M RC-558M Operating on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E

1 Press the input source button.

tart playback on the device you selectes Start playback on the device you selected for input.

3 Press the [LISTENING MODE] button, and then turn the [SELECT/PRESET] to select a listening mode.

Operating with the Remote Controller

1 Rollthe scroll wheel to select a device for playback. Perform this operation when neither the [MODE] button nor the [INPUT] button lights. If any but- ton lights, press it to turn it off. Rolling the scroll wheel lights both buttons, and switches the input source and the mode at the same time.

Start playback on the device you selected yl y for input.

3 Press the scroll wheel, and then press the listening mode button you want to select. PURE A button: To switch the listening mode to “Pure Audio.” When you select “PURE AUDIO," the video signal is interrupted (resulting in a blacked-out screen), and the [PURE AUDIO] indicator lights up.

DIRECT button: To switch the listening mode

+ When 5 channel signals are input, every time you press the button, the listening mode changes “DolbyEX” — “PLIIx Movie

(Default) — “PLIIx Music” — “NEO:6— “Off” = “DolbyEX;”" and so on.

When 2 channel signals are input, every time you press the button, the listening mode “PLIIX Movie (Default)” — “PLIIx — “PLIIX Game” — “NEO:6 Cinema” = “PLIIx Movie

switch the listening mode to

(Default)? THX button: “TX? When Dolby Digital multichannel (*/2) signals are input, you can switch to any of the following decode modes. Every time you press the button, the listening mode changes “THX Cinema” —> “SurroundEX” — “Ultra? Cinema (Default)” “MusicMode” — “Games Mode”—“THX Cin- ema,” and so on (See page 112). DSP/DSPB buttons: Every time you press the buttons, you can switch to any of the listening modes according to the input signals.

ALL ST button: To switch the listening mode to

+ When AAC’ multiplex sound signals are input, the main-sound and sub-sound are switched. Every time you press the [-{]/[b>]

buttons, the mode changes “Main” — “Sub”

— “Main + Sub” — “Main,” and so on.

When using the headphones, you can use the L<@}/D] buttons to switch on/off the Dolby Headphone listening mode.

A table listed later in this manual shows which listening mode can be used with which input signal format. See page 143.

Listening to Radio Broadcasts

One of the features of the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E that is most frequently used is its ability to play FM and AM broadcast radio stations. The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E provides a number of listening modes perfect for listening 10 the radio and getting the most out of your audio system. Also, by presetting radio stations that you listen to frequently, you can select them easily by pressing the ICH/DISC +/-] button on the remote controller.

Setting the AM Tuning Interval

For the Asian or Australian models, you have to adjust the “AM Frequency Step” setting according to your area. Use the Setup menu to adjust the “AM Frequency Step” setting.

To perform this setting, go to “Hardware Setup” — “AM Frequency Setup” — “Frequency Step,” and select “9 kHz” or “10 kHz.” For details on this setting, see page 87.

Tuning into a Radio Station

00c000 600006 e C:OZ soc

JT TUNING MODE SELECT/PRESET Tuning into a Radio Station Automatically (automatic tuning)

1 Press the [TUNER] input source button. Each time you press the [TUNER] but- ton, the input source changes between AM and FM.

Press the [TUNING MODE] button to turn on the “AUTO” indication.

3 Turn the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial either clockwise or counterclockwise.This starts tuning automatically.

The tuner stops automatically where it tunes into à station.

When you tune into a radio station,

> TUNED < indicator appears in the display. If you tune into an FM station in stereo, then “FM STEREO” appears.

When the FM stereo broadcast contains much noise: Press the [TUNING MODE] button to switch to the manual tuning mode, The “AUTO” indication disappears and the tuner turns into the monaural mode. In the monaural mode, the noise will be reduced and the broadcast be easier 10 hear.

Tuning into a Radio Station Manually {manual tuning)

1 Press the [TUNER] input source un button.

Each time you press the [TUNER] button, the input source changes between AM and

2 Press the [TUNING MODE] button we +0 turn off the “AUTO” indication. RC

3 Turn the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial

either clockwise or counterclockwise to tune your station.

Turning counterclockwise decreases the frequency, and tuning clockwise increases the frequency.

+ The tuner frequency changes in 200 kHz (50 kHz) increments for FM and 10 KHz (or 9 kHz) increments for AM.

+ When you tune into an FM station manually, the tuner turns into monaural mode. If you want to listen to the FM station in stereo, press the [TUNING MODE] button.

Specifying Radio Stations by Frequency

Remote controller To select a radio station by entering its frequency, press the remote controller’s IDIRECT TUNING] button, and then use the number but- tons to enter the frequency.

Listening to Radio Broadcasts—Continued

Selecting a Preset Radio Station

TUNING MODE MEMORY TUNER SELECT/PRESET Presetting a Radio Station

Up to 40 stations can be stored in memory as preset radio stations.

When using the remote controller:

1 Press the [INPUT] button, andthen use the scroll wheel to select TUNER.

1 Tune into the radio station you To switch to FM or AM, press the scroll desire (See “Tuning Into a Radio wheel. Station”).

2 Press the [MEMORY] button on the

Using the [SELECT/PRESET] dial, select a preset number (from 1 to 40) to assign the station.

The “MEMORY” indicator blinks for 5 seconds. Complete the procedure while the “MEMORY” indicator blinks. If the “MEMORY” indicator disappears before completing the procedure, go back to step 2 and repeat the procedure

2 Use the [CH/DISC +/-] button to select the presets.

Selecting Presets by Number

To select a preset by number, use the remote controller’s number buttons. For example, to select preset #7, press [7]. To select preset #12, press [1] then [2].

Erasing a Preset Radio Station

1 Press the [TUNER] input source rues button and use the [SSELECT/PRE-

again. SET] dial to select the preset radio station that you want to erase (See 4 Press the [MEMORY] button to above). BU ner finalize the procedure. Ÿ

You can enter text names for any of the preset radio stations (See page 97).

2 Press and hold the [MEMORY] but-

ton and then press the [TUNING &F MODE] button.

The selected preset station is erased.

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only)

Listening to RDS Broadcasts

RDS reception is available only on the European model and only in areas where RDS broadcasts are available. What is RDS?

RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a type of FM broadcasting. RDS was developed within the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. Many FM broadcasting stations now transmit the RDS signals, which provide the addi- tional information required. RDS provides you with var- ious services so that you can choose a station that broadcast your favorite categories of music, news, or other information.

There are three main classifications of RDS broadcasts. Though they can be tuned into by using the Tuning but- tons as normal stations, RDS broadcasts allow you to scan for stations of the type and classification for which you are looking. This makes it much easier for you to find the station you want (See “Performing a PTY Scan” and “Performing a TP Scan” on page 63). The three main classifications are explained below.

‘When an RDS station broadcasting RT information is selected, the text information received from the station is displayed.

When an RDS station broadcasting PTY information is selected, the station type (classification) is displayed. TP: Traffic Program

When an RDS station broadcasting TP information is selected, traffic information will be broadcast periodi- cally.

+_In some cases, the characters displayed on the display of the TX-NR5000E may not be exactly the same as the ones broadcast by the radio station. Also, unusual characters may appear on the display if the TX-NRS000E receives characters that cannot be dis- played correctly. This is not a malfunction.

When an RDS station broadcasting PS information is selected, the name of the station is displayed instead of the frequency.

PTY Program Types in Europe

The text given in parentheses is what is actually dis- played on the TX-NR5000E.

News reports (NEWS):

Reports on current events and happenings.

Current affairs (AFFAIRS):

Topical reporting of current affairs, often with a wider range of topics than news reports.

General information such as weather forecasts, con- sumer affairs, medical help, etc.

Live sports action, sports news, and interviews. Education (EDUCATE):

Formal educational programs.

Radio plays and serials.

Cultural programs (including religious affairs). Science and technology (SCIENCE):

Programs about the natural sciences and technology. Varied (VARIED):

Speech-based programs not covered by the above cate- gories (e.g., quizzes, panel games, and comedy).

Popular commercial music, usually from past or present sales charts (e.g., Top 40).

Rock music (ROCK M):

Popular music with an alternative appeal, often not appearing on sales charts.

Middle of the road music (M.O.R. M):

Easy listening music (as opposed to Pop, Rock, or Clas- sical).

Light classics (LIGHT M):

Classical music for general rather than specialist appre- ciation.

Serious classics (CLASSICS):

Performances of major orchestral works, symphonies, chamber music, etc. (including Grand Opera).

Other music (OTHER M):

Music styles not covered by the above categories (e.g., Jazz, Rhythm & Blues, Folk, Country, and Reggae).

When an RDS station is making an emergency broad- cast, this ALARM will flash on the display.

SA Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only) —Continued

RT/PTY/TP SELECT/PRESET Displaying Radio Text (RT)

Ifthe station you are currently tuned into is broadcasting RT signals, they will be displayed in the front display on the TX-NRS000E. If the station does not, this function

a To display the radio text, press the

KE [RT/PTY/TP] button once.

If the current station you are listening to is not an RDS station, only the frequency of the station will appear.

If “Waiting” appears on the display, more time is required to receive the RT information. When the information is received, the characters will scroll across the front display.

If “No Text Data” appears on the display, RT informa- tion is not available.

The display shows the frequency for 3 seconds and returns to program service name.

Performing a PTY Scan 1 Press the [TUNER] input source nues button and select the FM input source. 2 Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button me twice. The current program type appears on the display.

3 Using the [SELECT/PRESET] dial, select the PTY program type you

4 Press the [SELECT/PRESET] dial.

The TX-NR5000E will scan until it reaches a station of the program type you selected. It will then stop briefly at that station before continuing on until it reaches the next station. Pressing the ISELECT/PRESET] dial stops the PTY scan at that point. If you press the [RT/ PTY/TP] while “NONE” is displayed, SPTY ?” will appear. In this case, return 10 step 3.

Press the [SELECT/PRESET] dial when it reaches the station that you want to listen to.

“Not Found” will appear when no RDS

signal is being received from the station.

Performing a TP Scan

1 Press the [TUNER] input source button. 2 Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button

“[TPJ" will appear if the current station is broadcasting TP signals. TI tation will periodically broadcast traffic infor- mation. To find a different station, pro- ceed to the next step. Also, if “TP” is displayed, proceed to the next step.

Press the [SELECT/PRESET] dial. The TX-NR5000E will scan until it reaches a station broadcasting traffic information. If “Not Found” appears on the display, a TP station cannot be located.

Enjoying Multichannel Playback

To the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, you can be con- nected up to two devices, such as a DVD player, that deal with multichannel sounds (5.1-7.1 channels).

To use multichannel connections, you need to specify settings on the Input Setup menu. In addition, you can set listening modes as you prefer. Enjoy multichannel playback in the main room.

Use three or four multichannel connection cables or audio connection cables to connect the multichannel output jack on the connected device to the MULTI-CH IN 1/2 jack on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Specify the input source type. At default, DVD is “1}° CD is “2,” and others are “No

Wheel INPUT ENTER AIT» SETuP

1 Press the [INPUT] button, and then roll the scroll wheel to select the input source to be set.

4 Pressthe[A/[W] buttons to select “Audio Assign,”’ and then press the [ENTER] but- ton.

5 Press the [AJ[V] buttons to select “Multichannel;’ and then select a setting with the [-@]/[b-] buttons.

Select “1” when connected to MULTI-CH IN 1, or “2” when connected to MULTI-CH IN2.

6 Press the [SETUP] button. Setting is completed, and the menu screen disap- pears.

Enjoying Multichannel Playback—Continued

To configure the listening mode settings including

Playing Back in Multichannel Sound audio effect and playback options:

= You can specify detailed settings for the decode mode and the speaker environment for multichannel playback (Listening Mode Setup). See page 102 for details. Adjusting the Volume Level of Speakers for Multichannel Playback INPUT VOLi/T 588 CH SEL ES Es LEVEL -/+ AUDIO SEL — 5" 5 Es ee RC-557M RC-558M RC-557M RC-558M 1 Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [CH SEL] button to select a speaker 1 Press the [INPUT] button, and then roll the whose volume level you want to adjust. _A scroll wheel to select the input source to Speakers set by the Speaker Configuration sub- 4 be set. menu on the Speaker/Output Setup menu are dis-

played on à one-by-one basis.

2 Press the scroll wheel, and then press

(repeatedly) the [AUDIO SEL] button to 2 Pressthe [LEVEL -/+] button to adjustthe select “Multich” volume level. - You can adjust in the range from —12 dB to +12 SG Start playing. dB. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the range

from —15 dB to +12 dB.

4 Adjust the volume level with the [VOL 1/1] buttons. You can adjust the volume level in the range from —æ,-81.5 dB to 18.0 dB (when Relative is set for Volume Setup). Hint: You can also adjust the volume level with the input source button, the [AUDIO SELECTOR] button, and the [MASTER VOLUME] dial on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

The volume level of each speaker for multichannel sounds is different from the calibration level to be set with the test sound described on page 90. Adjustment made here is not reflected in playing other than the mul- tichannel playback.

You can also set the listening mode in advance for mul- tichannel playback (Listening Mode Preset). To do so, select “Input Setup” — “Listening Mode Preset” — “Multichannel” on the Setup menu to choose the pre- ferred mode. This defaults to “Multichannel.”

See page 57 for details of the listening mode, and page 97 for the listening mode preset.

SA Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone

You can connect speakers and amplifiers for the remote

zone, and enjoy different sources in a remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3). There are three ways to enjoy in a remote zone:

Connecting and Setup When Connecting Only Speakers (Zone 2)

You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone while a 5.1 channel source is being played in the main room.

Adjust the volume level on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E

1 Connect the speakers for Zone 2 to SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

2 Connect the video component for Zone 2

to any of the composite VIDEO OUT 1-4 terminals.

3 Set the Setup menu. 1. On the Setup menu (See page 88), select

“Speaker/Output Setup” "Speaker Con- figuration,” and set “Speaker B Surr BK” to

2. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” —> “Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal

connected to the component to “Zone 2 Out”

3. Press the [SETUP] button to close the menu.

When Connecting the Pre-main Amplifier or Receiver (Zone 2 or Zone 3)

+ You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone while a 7.1 channel source is being played in the main room.

+ Adjust the volume level on the pre-main amplifier or receiver in the remote zone.

TV Receiver/ Pre-main amplifier

1 Connect the pre-main amplifier or receiver for Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Connect to any of the following terminals:

DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

2 Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the pre-main amplifier or receiver.

3 Connect the video component for Zone 2 or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO OUT 1-4 terminals.

4 Set the Setup menu.

1. On the Setup menu (See page 91), select “Speaker/Output Setup” — “Audio Output Assign,” and set the terminal to which the component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out”

2. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to “Line Out (fixed).

3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” => “Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal to which the component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out”

4. Press the [SETUP] button to close the menu.

SA Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)}—Continued

When Connecting the Power Amplifier (Zone 2 or Zone 3)

You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone while a 7.1 channel source is being played in the main room.

Adjust the volume level on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E (not on the power amplifier).

Enjoying Movies and Music in a Remote Zone

The sleep timer in the main room also works in Zone 2 and Zone 3. To make the sleep timer effective only in Zone 2 or Zone 3, set the sleep timer on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E in the main room, and then put it into the standby status.

When “Speaker B Surr Back” is set to “Powered Zone 2” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu of the Speaker/Output Setup menu, 7.1 channel play- back is disabled in the main room.

Sounds and pictures that can be output to Zone 2 and Zone 3 are as follows:

1 Connectthe power amplifier for Zone 2 or

Zone 3 to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Connect to any of the following terminals:

+ DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

+ DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

2 Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone

3 to the power amplifier.

REC rom put ZONE (ZONE |To Output Terminal 13 v | 1 Jaunioour 15 (AUDIO) ve | w°2 [DIGITAL OUT oPTICAL 1-2 V2 | V2 [DIGITAL OUT coAxIAL 1-2 5 v | v launioouris à | ETHERNET, £ PH, DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2 & [aUDIOIN 19 E DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2 Digrrac in | * | #1 JAUDIO our 15 PRET DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2 COAXIAL 1-6 v | v (piGITAL OUT coaxIAL 12 : [vmeowts | Ÿ VIDEO OUT 1-4 & |S VIDEOIN 1 € |. comPo- IS VIDEO OUT 1-4 8 | NENT VIDEO È INT ICOMPONENT VIDEO OUT

3 Connect the video component for Zone 2

or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO OUT 1-4 terminals.

4 Setthe Setup menu.

1. On the Setup menu (See page 91), select “Speaker/Output Setup” — “Audio Output Assign,” and set the terminal to which the component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out”

. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to “Pre Out (variable).”

3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” —>

“Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal 10 which the component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out.”

4. Press the [SETUP] button to close the

#2 Super Audio CD and DVD-Audio are not output. #3 Possible for 2 channel downmix signal.

Columns covered by “ \” indicate that no setting related 10 the column is specified for Zone 2 Out or Zone 3 Out in “Audio Output Assign” or “Video Output Assign.”

SA Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3) —Continued

Operating with the Remote Controller

Operating on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E When operating with the remote controller, how to operate depends on the location of Zone 2 or Zone 3, or the distance from the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

+_ Point the remote controller at the infrared receiver on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, and then operate the controller.

Install à remote controller sensor in Zone 2 or Zone 3 through an IR connection (See page 45).

Switch the Transmission Signal Format to RF (Radio Frequency) (depending on the destination) (See page 41).

ON, STANDBY ex © a 8 5e) — ZoNE 3 Sels) —Z0NE2 $ S e ©

1 Power onthe devices in Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button, and then the [ON] button.

Rotate the scroll wheel to select a source while

the button is not lighted, press the [ZONE2] or

[ZONE 3] button to light it).

+ When you have selected the tuner, you can choose a preset channel with the [CH DISC +/-] button.

3 Adjust the volume level. Press the [ZONE 2] (or [ZONE 3]) button, and within 5 seconds, press the [LEVEL -/+] button to adjust the volume level. Notes: When the pre-main amplifier or receiver is connected, the volume level should be adjusted at the connected component side. When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the [ZONE 2] (or [ZONE 3]) button, and then press the [STANDBY] button.

STANDBY/ON ZONE2 REC/ZONE3

SELECT/PRESET CONTROL / TUNING Turn on the power supply to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, and then select a source for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

For Zone 2, press the [ZONE 2] button, and then select the source with the [SELECT/PRESET] dial. For Zone 3, press the [REC/ZONE 3] button, and then, select the source with the [CONTROL/ TUNING] dial.

When you press the [ZONE 2] or [REC/ZONE 3] button, the [STANDBY] indicator on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E blinks for five sec- onds, so perform operations while it is blinking. The source button for Zone 2 lights in green and the source buttton for Zone 3 lights in red.

To switch the source for Zone 2 (or Zone 3) and the main room simultaneously:

Repeatedly press the [ZONE 2] (or [REC/ZONE 31) button to display “Z2Sel: SOURCE,” and then select the source.

Adjust the volume level.

For Zone 2, press the [LEVEL] button under the

[ZONE 2] button, and then adjust with the

ISELECT/PRESET] dial.

For Zone 3, press the [LEVEL] button under the

IREC/ZONE 3] button, and then adjust with the

ICONTROL/TUNING] dial.

+ When a pre-main amplifier or receiver is connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E, the volume level should be adjusted at the connected component side.

SA Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)— Continued

+ When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the [ZONE 2] (or [REC/ZONE 3]) button, and then press the [STANDB Y/ON] button. Or press the [ZONE 2] (or [REC/ZONE 3]) but- ton, and then turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Off.” In the case of Zone 2, the green indicator on the input source button is turned off, and in the case of Zone 3, the red indicator is turned off.

When operating in the main room, be sure to confirm that the [STANDB Y] indicator is not blinking, and then start operations. When not using in the main room, press the [STANDB Y/ ON] button. If the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is in the standby status, the power supply to Zone 2 and Zone 3 is not switched off.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E can not only record the playing source but can also record a source while play- ing another source. You can also combine a video and audio to create a new source. Signals that can be output to a video/audio recording device vary with the type of jack connected. Check the following conditions before starting recording: Audio + Signals (analog) from the ETHERNET, PH, or AUDIO IN jacks are output only to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Music signals of MP3, WMA, and WAVE to be played with Net-Audio are also output only to analog audio output jacks. No signal is output from the MULTI-CH IN jacks. No signal is output from the HDMI IN jacks. Record- ing via the HDMI OUT jack is also disabled because Rec Out is not available in Audio Output Assign. + Signals from the DIGITAL IN OPTICAL or COAX- IAL jacks are output to the DIGITAL OUT OPTI- CAL or COAXIAL jacks. PCM signals are converted into analog signals, and also output to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Only PCM signals are output from the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Digital signals are output from the i.LINK (AUDIO) termi- nals to the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks, but signals on Super Audio CD and DVD- Audio are not output. Video + Video signals from the VIDEO IN, S VIDEO IN, or COMPONENT VIDEO IN jack are output only to the VIDEO OUT jacks.

{4 Ni 7 Recording a Source—Continued

Some steps can also be operated on the remote control-

: 4 Press the input source button to select ler, but described here are operations on the the com tf dio/vid. rdi TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. ponent ‘or auclo/vigeo recording

(player side). Notes: + No surround effects can be recorded. 5 Press the [REC/ZONE 3] button, and within 3 + No DVD or any sources whose copyright is protected seconds, select “Rec Sel: SOURCE” with the can be recorded, [CONTROL/TUNING] dial.

There are some restrictions on recording of digital audio/video signals. Refer to the manual of your recording component.

If recorded as analog signals, DTS signals are

Pressing the [REC/ZONE 3] button makes the [STANDBY] indicator blink for 3 seconds. Select the target source while the indicator is a s blinking. The name of the source to be recorded recorded as noise, so never record signals from a is indicated in the display window, and the button DTS-compatible CD or LD. for the source selected lights in red.

Input source buttons Audio/video recording is enabled on the compo- nent for which “Rec Out” was specified in step 3.

[e] LD 6 Prepare the component for audio/video recording (recorder side).

Put the component for audio/video recording into the recording standby status.

You should adjust the recording level on the recording component.

For how to record, refer to the manual of the recoding component.

(=) STANDBY indicator

CONTROL/TUNING SELECT/PRESET

x RONTE = = 7 Start audio/video recording Recording Audio/Video While Playing Play the component selected in step 4.

—<$} Recording music or a movie you are currently playing. * Switching the source during audiovideo Operate on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E in the main recording will record the source newly room. selected.

If you select FM (or AM) with the [TUNER] input source button when the recording source is set to AM (or FM), the output for the record- ing source also changes to AM (or FM).

1 Tumonthe power supply to TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

2 Check the connection to your recording component. An audio recorder should be connected to the AUDIO OUT or DIGITAL OUT jacks, and a video recorder to the VIDEO OUT jacks.

Recording Audio/Video on a Component While Playing Another

You can record an audio source or a video on a compo- nent while playing another source on another compo- nent, For example, you can record a CD while watching

3 Check settings for a recorder connected. 1. On the Setup menu (See page 91), select

“Speaker/Output Setup” — “Audio Output a DVD. Operate this function on the TX-NR1000/ Assign,” and specify “Rec Out” as the setting TX-NR5000E in the main room. for the jack to which your audio recording

, component is connected. 1 Tum on the power supply to TX-NR1000/

. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” —> DCNRS000E In MAIN À or MAIN B mode Video Output Assign," and specify “Video Proceeding to the next step in the Standby status

XX Rec Out” as the setting for the jack to > : : : : : makes the Zone 3 mode effective, so be sure to which your video recording component is turn on the power source.

connected. 3. Press the [SETUP] button to close the menu. Hint: 2 Since Zone 3 Out and Rec Out use the same cir- cuitry, audio recording is disabled if Zone 3 Out is specified. Audio/video recording is also dis- abled on the same component as that for playing.

SA Check connections and settings to the recording component.

Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/ Video While Playing” in the previous section.

Recording a Source—Continued

3 Press the [REC/ZONE3] button, and within 3 seconds, select “Rec Sel:SOURCE” with the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial.

Pressing the [REC/ZONE 3] button makes the [STANDBY] indicator blink for 3 seconds. Select the target sources while the indicator is blinking. The name of the source to be recorded is indicated in the display window. Audio/video recording is enabled on the component for which “Rec Out” was specified in step 2.

6 Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Composite Video,” and set it to “3” with the [CONTROL/TUNING] dial.

After setting to “3,” press the [SETUP] button.

7 nserta CDin the CD player and insert a tape in the video camera connected to the VIDEO IN 3 jacks.

4 Prepare the component for audio/video recording (recorder side).

8 Insert a tape in the VCR connected to the VIDEO OUT 2 jacks.

5 Start audio/video recording. You cannot listen to a broadcast from one station while recording a broadcast from another station.

Recording the Video from One Source and the Audio from Another Source

You can add audio signals from a source to a video of another source to make your own custom video record- ings. Below is an example of recording audio signals from a CD player connected to the DIGITAL IN OPTI- CAL 2 jack and the video from a video camera con- nected to VIDEO IN 3 onto a video cassette tape on a VCR connected to VIDEO OUT 2.

Operate this function in the main room.

9 Press the [REC/ZONE 3] button, and within 8 seconds, select “Rec Sel:SOURCE” with the [CONTROL/TUN- ING] dial.

Now, the CD player has been selected as the audio input source, and VIDEO 3 as the video input source.

10 Start recording on the VCR, and start play- ing on the CD player and the video cam- era.

Playback starts on the component selected in steps 3-6.

Switching the source during audio/video record- ing will record the source newly selected.

1 Turn on the power supply to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E in MAIN A or MAIN B mode.

2 Check connections and settings to the recording component. Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/Video While Playing” on page 70.

Press the [CD] input source button.

Press the [SETUP] button to display Main menu, and turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Input Setup.”

After selecting “Input Setup,” press the [ENTER] button.

To carry out steps 3-6 on the remote controller, fol- low the procedures described on page 95.

5 Turn the [SELECT/PRESET] dial to select “Video Setup,’ and press the [ENTER] button.

A Net-Tune server is a computer server running Net- Tune system protocol, including a Net-Tune-compatible home server or a PC with Net-Tune Central installed. The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E can be used as a Net- Tune client on a standard Ethernet network. By install- ing Onkyo’s Net-Tune Central server software on your computer, you can play all of your MP3, WMA, and WAV files through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. If your network is connected to the Internet, you can also tune into Internet radio stations.

With Internet radio you can:

+ Listen to stations that use MP3 or WMA format streaming.

+ Select stations by genre, location, or language.

+ Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

For audio delivery over Ethernet, Onkyo developed NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it's based on the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it's efficient and very responsive.

You can download Onkyo's Net-Tune Central server

software from the following Onkyo Web sites:

Net-Tune Central searches your PC’s hard disk for

music files and automatically creates a music database,

making it very easy to set up. Net-Tune clients, includ- ing the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, can then play music in the database.

Net-Tune Central supports the following file formats,

and sampling rates of 32 KHz, 44.1 KHz, and 48 KHz.

+ WAV: high quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.

+ MP3: high quality, compressed, small file size.

+ WMA: high quality, compressed, smaller file size than MP3, developed by Microsoft (Protected WMA files cannot be played).

Before you download Net-Tune Central, you’1l be

prompted to enter the serial number printed on the rear

of your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. Depending on your

Internet connection, it may take 10 or more minutes to

Net-Tune Central Editing Functions

With Net-Tune Central you can edit the titles, album, and artist names of your MP3, WMA, and WAV files, and create and edit genre names. In addition, you can make playlists of your favorite tracks.

Computer Requirements

The computer requirements necessary for running the Net-Tune Central server software are as follows:

+ Operating system: Windows XP or 2000 (Mac OS not supported).

Hard disk: At least 20 MB for Net-Tune Central. Obviously you’Il also need space to store your music files. MP3 and WMA uses approximately 1 MB per minute, while WAV uses approximately 10 MB per minute, although this will depend on the sampling rate and bit rate that you use. MP3 files made using certain encoders may not be playable, or may be noisy when played.

Network Requirements

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's Ethernet port sup- ports 10Base-T. For best results, a 100Base-T switched Ethernet network is recommended. Although it's theo- retically possible to use a wireless network, due to unpredictable performance, it may not provide satisfac- tory results, so a wired network is recommended.

A router manages the network, routing data and supply- ing IP addresses. Your router must support the follow- ing:

+ NAT (Network Address Translation)

NAT allows several networked computers to access the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet con- nection. The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E needs Inter- net access for Internet radio.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) DHCP supplies IP address information to network devices, allowing them to configure themselves auto- matically.

A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom- mended.

Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs require you to use specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you're unsure.

M CATS5 Ethernet cable

Use a standard CATS Ethernet cable (straight type).

To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have Internet access. À narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom- mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you're unsure.

Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

Notes: + The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E does not support

+ To use Internet radio with the TX-NR1000/ PPPOE settings, so if you have a PPPOE-type Internet TX-NR5000E, your broadband Internet connection connection, you must use a PPPOE compatible router. needs to be up and running and able to access the + Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a Web. Please consult your ISP if you have any prob- proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is con- lems with your Internet connection. figured to use a proxy server, use the same settings

+_ The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E uses DHCP and AutoIP (See page 121).

to configure its network settings automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually, see page 121.

Networking Your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E To connect the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CATS Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (Net-Tune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.

The following diagram shows how you can connect the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to your Ethernet network. Here it is connected to a LAN port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.

You can connect any number of TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Es to the network, and Net-Tune Central can serve up to three clients simultaneously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a Net-Tune network with two TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Es.

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Internet radio

You can install Net-Tune central on several networked computers and use the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's Select Server setting to select the server whose music database you want to access (See page 95).

About Network Configuration

When you use a broadband router with the DHCP function enabled, the network settings will be configured automati- cally. In this case, you do not have to make any settings using the setup menu. If you disabled the DHCP function on the broadband router, configure the network settings manually referring to page 121.

Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

Using the Remote Controller

To select Net-Tune mode, press the [MODE] button, and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears on the display.

While neither the [INPUT] button nor [MODE] button is illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously (when you enter the Net-Tune mode, be sure that the LCD display shows “MSRV” or “IRD” in the top line and “NET-T” in the bottom line).

RC-557M RC-558M SA Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

1. Number/letter buttons These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters when searching for music in your Net-Tune server. 2 MODE button This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. Press this button first,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears on the display. 3] Up/Down/LeftRight A/W/-4/»- & ENTER

buttons These buttons are used to navigate Internet radio and Net-Tune server menus. The [ENTER] button is used to confirm items and to start playback of the Net-Tune server.

4 CH/DISC +/- button This button is used to select Internet radio presets.

5 Play b button This button is used to start playback of the Net-Tune server.

6 Previous/Next KH«/»»1 buttons The Previous KA button is used to select the pre- vious track. During playback it selects the begin- ning of the current track. The Next >» button is used to select the next track.

7 Pause BE button This button is used to pause playback.

8 REPEAT button This button is used for repeat playback.

9 ALBUM button This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s music library by album. 10 PLAYLIST button This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s library by playlist. CAPS button This button is used to select lowercase letters, uppercase letters, and numbers when searching for the Net-Tune server’s music by album, artist, or playlist. 12 DELETE button This button is used to delete characters entered with the number/letter buttons. 13 INPUT button This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “MSRV” (Music Server) or “IRD” (Internet Radio) appears on the display.

14 FR/FF <«/»> buttons The FR #4 button is used to start fast reverse. The FF % button is used to start fast forward.

15 Stop M button This button is used to stop playback.

This button is used for random playback. ARTIST button

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s music library by artist.

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s music library by genre, and to search for Internet radio stations by genre.

This button is used to search for Internet radio sta- tions by country.

This button is used to search for Internet radio sta- tions by language.

Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

NET AUDIO 4 Press the [ENTER] button.

Wait while your requested data is down- load from the XiVA Internet Radio Ser-

vice. &\ * What is the XiVA Internet Radio sans == Service? | 5 555 20:02 mocs | The XiVA Internet Radio Service pro-

vides tuning information, allowing

3 . you to select from a large number of stations. You can find Internet Radio ee Stations based on your interests, Ô6s= musical taste, language, and location. 220e 2280 When Genre is selected: 8828 Allow a few moments until the Genre sr Scroll wheel menu appears. When the main list of MODE—"=| le —INPUT genres appears, use the [A J/[W] buttons fs to select the genre desired. Pressing the CH/DISC +/- [ El ENTER, [ENTER] button brings up the sub-list DISPLAY —"2* AV» of the genre you selected, which a: prompts you to further select one of the 2 items using the [ A J/W] buttons. When Location is selected: The list containing names of countries appears. Use the [ A I/[W] buttons to Man F select the desired item. Enov nant eradrs When Language is selected: To listen to Internet radio, the connection/configuration The list of languages appears. Use the requirements listed on pages 72-73 must be satisfied. LA/LW] buttons to select your desired item. 1 While neither the [INPUT] button If no list is found, “No List” appears.

nor [MODE] button is illuminated, You can return from this screen to the

roll the scroll wheel to select previous selection screen by pressing the IRD (Internet Radio). [-@] button.

“NET-T” appears in the bottom line.

On the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E 5 Press the [ENTER] button.

press the [NET AUDIO] button. This You are presented with a list of radio sta- button switches between two alternative tion names.

settings: Server and Internet Radio.

2 Press the [DISPLAY] button on the remote controller.

If the main menu has been already dis- 6

played, go to the next step. Use the [AJ/[W] buttons to select

one of the radio stations. You can return to the previous step by pressing the [-@{] button.

3 Use the [AJIW] buttons to select one of the main menus: Genre, Location, or Language.

To cancel, press the [-@{] button.

SA Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

7 Press the [ENTER] button. Buffering starts with the following mes- sage displayed.

When the buffering is complete, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E starts play- back of the broadcast.

If you're using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN), depending on the station, Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best results use a broadband connection (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc).

You can switch the displayed content using the [ A J/[W] buttons.

After the switch operation, the display mode appears for 3 seconds, and then the appropriate information scrolls.

If there is no information on title or art- ist, “No Info” appears.

When using the OSD screen, all the information is displayed on one screen without scrolling.

OSD |inet radio Station ONK 7h

Station ou Live Program

Station ou Live artist

Presetting Internet Radio Stations

You can preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

1 Receive your desired station.

2 Press the [p-] button.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E enters

into preset mode; the currently selected

preset number blinks for 5 seconds. Preset number

3 Press the [ENTER] button. The preset is now complete.

Choosing a Preset Internet Radio Station

While neither the [INPUT] button

nor [MODE] button is illuminated, roll the scroll wheel to select IRD (Internet Radio).

2 Use the remote controller's

[CH DISC +/- ] button to select the preset.

When you choose a preset station, the Station name is displayed for 5 seconds, and then the progress of buffering is dis- played instead.

When the progress of buffering reaches 100%, you will be presented with the playing screen.

Erasing a preset Internet radio station

1 Select the station to erase, follow- ing the instructions described above.

2 Press the [p-] button.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E enters into preset erase mode.

3 Press the [ENTER] button. Your selected station is erased.

“Disconnected” The Net-Tune server may not start or the Number/letter__| server connected to previously may not buttons be found. Confirm the connections Scroll wheel between router, the Net-Tune server, and MODE INPUT the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E. Start the ENTER Net-Tune server or select another server AVS Ë fl referring to “Select Server” on “Music DISPLAY SX Server Sub-menu” (See page 95). SEEN — 64, mm, Dom 4 Press the [b-] button to play the mn Vers | page mule fl. SH TII. NS Remote + : rx : provi PLAYLIST-| 2228 1L GENRE controle The TX-NR 1000/T X- NRSO00E provides pe five normal display modes; you can use the [ A J/[W] button to switch among Playing a Music File Saved on the C5 them, Net-Tune Server OSD [russe server Play To play music files saved on your PC, the requirements me ny et canp listed on page 72 must be satisfied. My Best 100 PSE uappy panor 1 Turn on the Net-Tune server. PRÉ pa 160kbpa Wait until the Net-Tune server starts up. It may take a few second. Display un 2 Turn on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. When you connect the TX-NR1000/ * To stop playback: — S TX-NR5000E to the network the first time, Press the [I] button on the remote controller. it will be connected to the first server found. + To pause playback: Press the [FE] button on the remote controller. 3 While neither the [INPUT] button + To select a track: nor [MODE] button is illuminated, Press the [ kk« ]/[ #1] button on the remote control- roll the scroll wheel to select ler. MSRV (Music Server). Press the [»»1] button to move to the next track. “NET-T” appears in the bottom line. Press the [ k@ ] button to move to the beginning of

On the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5O00E, press the current track; hold down the [ He ] button to the [NET AUDIO] button. This button move to the previous track.

switches between two alternative settings: You can also use the number/letter buttons to select a Server and Internet Radio. track.

Until the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E Examples:

connects to the network, finds the server, To select number 3, press 3.

and completes the connection, “Network select number 10, pre: -, L'and 0. Starting...” and “Connecting...” appears. select number 37, press --/-, 3 and 7.

After completing the connection to the select number 123, press --/--- twice, and then Net-Tune server, the display changes to press 1, 2 and 3.

the normal indication. To select number 2568, press --/--- third, and then If the following messages appear, check press 2, 5, 6, and 8.

the message meaning and perform the appropriate procedures.

To fast forward/reverse the music: Press and hold the [ »# | button on the remote con-

“No Track” roller to fast forward the music: press and hold the The Net-Tune server could not retrieve [4 ] button to fast reverse the music. When the any track information. Register tracks music track is back at its beginning, normal playing with the Net-Tune server. starts.

If you have already registered tracks, use the [DISPLAY], [ARTIST], [ALBUM], [GENRE], and [PLAYLIST] buttons to

display information.

To switch to the track list: While playing the music, you can press the [HE] but- ton to display a list of currently open tracks.

SA Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

Selecting a Track List

You can use the music file data saved on the Net-Tune server to select which tracks to play.

For example, you can:

+ Select a track list based on the album name

+ Select a track list based on the artist name

+ Select a track list based on the genre name

+ Select a play list

1 Press either the [ALBUM], [ART-

IST], [GENRE], or [PLAYLIST] but-

&BS%@ ton on the remote controller.

Search the tracks stored on the Net-Tune

server with your selected mode to display it

In the artist and album modes, the tracks

are displayed in alphabetical order.

You can also use the procedure below.

1. Press the [DISPLAY] button.

2. You can press the [ A V/{W] buttons to cyclically switch among the four modes: Albums «Artists <> Genres 3 Playlists

3. Press the [ENTER] button.

Upper case (A) — Lower case (a) — Numeric value (2)

—.. When your desired input type is selected, then

press the number/letter button.

Let us take the [2ABC] button as an example to see the

When the upper case is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

letter “A.” Pressing twice will do a search by “B}” press-

ing three times by “C2”

When the lower case is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

letter “a.” Pressing twice will do a search by “b} press-

ing three times by “c.”

When the numeric value is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

To cancel the operation:

+ Press the [DELETE] button to delete the entered let- ter or number.

+ Pressing the [DISPLAY] button on the main unit will display the current listening mode.

Playing a Music File At Random

2 Use the [ATV] buttons to select one from the menu.

At this time, pressing [-] button brings you one step back where you can change the selection you made.

Also, pressing [BB] button in the genre or artist selection mode will display a list of albums with the genre or artist you selected.

In the album, artist, or playlist selection mode, using the number/letter buttons will accelerate your selection operation (See below).

3 Press the [ENTER] button. The title of your selected track appears. You can choose another track by pressing the [A /[W] buttons.

EX Press the [-@] button to return to the pre- vious step.

You can also select the list number using the number/letter buttons.

Press the [ENTER] button. The playback begins.

Using the number/letter buttons

CAPS— TE The number/letter buttons allow you to input one of the letters or numbers printed on their key tops. Pressing the ICAPS] button cyclically switches the types of input:

LS Press the [RANDOM!] button on the remote controller when in stop mode.

RE This button displays the current random settings and switches between two alter- native settings: On and Off. On: Randomly plays the tracks in the currently selected mode Off: Random mode is disabled. After the necessary settings are com- plete, press the [B>] button.

Playing a Music File Repeatedly

Press the [REPEAT] button on the remote controller.

(=) This button displays the current repeat settings and cyclically switches among three alternative settings: Repeat 1 — AI — Off.

epeats the current track only.

epeats the tracks in the

currently selected mode.

Repeat Off: Repeat mode is disabled.

You can operate the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000E when playing and when

Enjoying Net Audio—Continued

Configuring the Music Server

The music server settings can be made while you select the music server as an input source.

Press the [INPUT] button, and then roll the scroll wheel to select MSRV.

Make sure that the “MSRV” is displayed when you configure the music server.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [SETUP] button to dis- play the Main Menu.

The setup screen for the sub-menu

Use the [A] and [W] cursor but- tons to select “Select Server” and then use the [-@] and [b-] cursor buttons to select the desired server.

Select a network server that exists on the network.

* mark appears next to the servers detected on the network. If there is a server that does not have a * mark, make sure that the server is running. “Not Found” message indicates that no server is currently available for selection. If the message appears, make sure that the server is connected and running.

Press the [SETUP] button.

This completes the configuration proce- dure and the menu disappears.

When choosing settings on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E, after select- ing the input source using the input source buttons, press the [SETUP] button. Next, select the menu you want to configure by turning the [SELECT/PRESET] dial and press the dial to confirm the selection. Then, after selecting the submenu you want to configure by turning the ISELECT/PRESET] dial, select your value by turning the [CONTROL/TUN- ING] dial, and press the dial to confirm the value. If you want to go back to the previous operation, press the [EXIT] but- ton.

NA Enjoying Net Audio —Continued

When making the various settings required to configure your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E for optimum performance, you can use either the OSD Menu that appears on your television monitor or you can use the display on the front of the

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The OSD Menu is a settings menu that is displayed on your TV monitor.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is equipped with an independent Setup Menu not only for Main room À but also for Main room B and Zone 2 room, which allows you to specify settings for each room. The Setup Menu includes various These menus are then divided into various sub-menus, and these contain settings for you to optimize your home

menus theater as you wish.

The display shown below is an example. The actual contents of your display may differ depending on the model for

your region and the selected input source.

For more information on operating instructions, see page 86.

*The text appeared with your unit may slightly differ than those printed here, however there is no difference in items to be displayed or meanings in them.

Setup Menu—Continued

-Headphone Level Setup

Setup Menu—Continued

3.08D Position — 1" I

Setup Menu—Continued

The Zone 2 settings shown on this page can be made when you

perform either of the following

settings in the “MAIN A° setup

+ Under the ‘Speaker/Output Setup —> Speaker Configuration menu, when you select the surround back setting to “Powered Zone 2. (The main menu À below)

+ Under the ‘Speaker/Output

SA Setup Menu—Continued

Navigating the Setup Menu

You can change Setup Menu settings using the buttons on the front panel and on the remote controller.

The illustrations here represent the remote controller.

1 Press the scroll wheel when using the remote controller.

2 Press the button of the room where you

want to perform operations.

Press [MAIN A], [MAIN B], or [ZONE 2].

If the room where you want to perform operations has already been activated, you do not have to press the button here. Pressing the button while the corresponding room is activated deactivates the room for setup.

3 Press the [SETUP] button.

The main menu appears on your television monitor.

Æ Using the [A] and [W] cursor buttons, select the menu that you want to enter.

5 Press the [ENTER] button to enter the selected menu.

The screen for that menu appears.

6 Use the [A] and [Y] cursor buttons to select the sub-menu that you want to enter and press the [ENTER] button. Each sub-menu has different settings that can be changed as desired, and they are all explained in the pages that follow. To change a setting, first select it using the [ A] and [W] cursor buttons, and then change the setting using the [-@f] and D] cursor buttons.

7 Pressthe [SETUP] button to exit the Setup Menu. Press the [RETURN] button to set the new settings and return to the previous menu.

When you perform settings using the buttons on the front panel, press the [SETUP] button first. Use the [SELECT/PRESET] dial instead of the [A J/[W] buttons to select menus or parameters and press the dial to confirm your selection. Then use the [CONTROL/ TUNING] dial instead of the [-@f]/[p-] buttons to select your setting or parameter values and press the dial to confirm your selection. In addition, the [EXIT] button is used instead of the [RETURN] button.

In this section, you will perform the initial settings for the following scenarios. + When you want to change the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E’s remote control ID. + When you want to fix the TV Format setting to PAL or NTSC.

+ When you want to fix the AM Frequency Step setting to 9 KHz or 10 KHz.

Remote Control Setup Sub-menu AM Frequency Setup Sub-menu Asian and Australian Models Onl Remote ID (Asian and Australian Models Only) Fhis section explains how to change the TX-NR1000/ Frequency Step TX-NRSO00E’s remote control ID. You may need to The setting in this sub-menu determines the incremental change this if the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSOO0E's remote or decremental amount when adjusting the AM tuner controller interferes with other Onkyo components frequency. The initial setting is 9 kHz, and this only located in the same room. You can select 1, 2, or 3 for needs to be changed if you are using the TX-NR1000/ remote control D. : . TX-NR5000E in a 10 KHz region. If you change the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E'S remote 9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz increments are used in your area. control ID, be sure to select the same ID on the remote 10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz increments are used in your controller (See page 142). The default ID for both the area. TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and remote controller is 1. No!

It is recommended that you perform setup using the [SETUP]/[SELECT/PRESETI/CONTROL/TUNING}/ IEXIT] buttons of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's front panel.

If the remote controller is used for setup, signals from the remote controller will not be received just after the remote control ID settings have been changed (See “Changing the Remote Controller’s Control ID” on page 142 to change the remote control ID on the remote controller).

TV Format (for all models other than USA and Canadian models)

The settings in the TV Format sub-menu can be configured for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A. When you want to reconfigure the settings to conform 10 the television format used in the area where you use the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, use this sub-menu so that no time is wasted on detection.

Auto: This is the default setting. When you leave this setting unchanged, the television format is detected and automatically set by the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. PAL: Use this setting when you know the television format is PAL.

NTSC: Use this setting when you know the television format is NTSC.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E provides a wide range of variations in speaker connections and speaker settings, so you have to specify speaker settings according to conditions of each variation. For proper selection of an AV device connected at switching of the input type, you also need to allocate “audio output” and “video output” to each input type. If this allocation is incorrect, the desired component will not play a selected input source.

Please setup correctly by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet.

Speaker Configuration Sub-menu

Specify the rooms where you want to use speakers connected to the SPEAKERS A terminal and the SPEAKERS B terminal. Specify according to settings for main room A.

Basically, a speaker set with the maximum number of speakers should be connected to the SPEAKERS A terminals and configured for main room A (Main A). When either the center, surround, or surround back speakers are not connected to the SPEAKERS A terminals, or any of these speakers is set to “Not Used” in the Speaker A settings, you cannot perform the settings for the corresponding speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals and those speakers connected 10 the SPEAKERS B terminals cannot be used.

(Speaker À) Front L/R The setting of the front speakers is initially fixed to Main A.

Always install speakers connected to FRONT L/R of SPEAKERS A in main room A.

(Speaker À) Center, Surr L/R Main A (default): Select this when using the center speaker and/or surround speakers in main room A. Not Used: Select this when not using a center speaker or surround speakers.

(Speaker À) Surr Back

Main A 2ch (default): If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,” you can select this item. Select this when connecting and using two surround back speakers in main room A. Main A 1ch (SBL): If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,” you can select this item. Select this when connecting and using a surround back speaker in main room A.

BTL for Front: Select this when using the front speaker in main room À by connecting the surround back channel to the speaker via BTL (See page 27). Bi-Amp for Front: Select this when using the front speaker in main room À by connecting the front channel and the surround back channel to the speaker via Bi- Amp (See page 27).

Not Used: Select this when not using surround back speakers.

IF “Not Used” is selected for Surr L/R, this item defaults to “Not Used.”

(Speaker À) Subwoofer

Main A (default): Select this when using a subwoofer in the main room A.

Not Used: Select this when not using a subwoofer in the main room A.

(Speaker B) Front L/R Main A: Select this when using in main room A. Main B: Select this when using in main room B. Not Used (default): Select this when not using.

Main A: Select this when using in main room A.

Main B: Select this when using in main room B. This setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)

Front L/R” setting to “Main B Not Used (default): Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Surr L/R Main A: Select this when using in main room A.

Main B: Select this when using in main room B. This setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)

Front L/R” setting to “Main B Not Used (default): Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Surr Back

Main A 2ch: Select this when connecting and using two surround back speakers in main room A. Main A 1ch (SBL): Select this when connecting and using a surround back speaker in main room A. Main B 2ch: If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr L/R are both set to “Main B,” you can select this item. Select this when connecting and using two surround back speakers in main room B. Main B 1ch (SBL): If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr L/R are both set to “Main B;" you can select this item. Select this when connecting and using a surround back speaker in main room B. Powered Zone 2: Select this when using in Zone 2. +_If (Speaker A) Surr Back is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” this item is not displayed (Because, if “Powered Zone 2” is set, BTL connection and/or Bi-Amp connection are disabled). BTL for Front: This setting can be made only when you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A” or “Main B.” Select this when using the front speaker in main room B by connecting the surround back channel to the speaker via BTL (See page 27).

SA Speaker/Output Setup—Continued

Bi-Amp for Front: This setting can be made only when you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A” or “Main B.” Select this when using the front speaker in main room B by connecting the front channel and the surround back channel to the speaker via Bi-Amp (See page 28).

Not Used (default): Select this when not using surround back speakers.

If (Speaker A) Surr Back is set to “Main A Ich,” you cannot select “Main A 2ch” and “Main B 2ch” here.

(Speaker B) Subwoofer

This setting can be made only when you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A” or “Main B”

Main A: Select this when using a subwoofer in main room B.

Main B: Select this when using a subwoofer in main room B. This setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main B”

Not Used (default): Select this when not using a subwoofer.

When the settings for Speaker Configuration are completed, the subsequent settings should be speci- fied separately in main room À, main room B, and Zone 2.

Speaker Impedance Sub-menu

Use this sub-menu to set the impedance level of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to match the specifications of the speakers you are using. The settings in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu can be configured for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

The selectable parameters are common to all items. Note:

Before you change this setting, be sure to first lower the volume at the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to the minimum level.

8 ohms (default): Select this when the impedance of the connected speaker is 8 ohms or more.

6 ohms: Select this when the impedance of the connected speaker is no lower than 6 ohms and

no higher than 8 ohms.

4 ohms: Select this when the impedance of the connected speaker is no lower than 4 ohms and

no higher than 6 ohms.

+ When “BTL for Front” is selected for “Surr Back” from the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the corresponding “Front L/R” is automatically fixed to “8 ohms,” and the impedance settings for the surround back speakers are also removed. Please verify that the impedance of a connected speaker is 8 ohms or more.

For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is displayed.

The settings in the Speaker Crossover sub-menu can be configured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”

Front L/R, Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back

Specify a threshold frequency in Hz for bass sounds from each speaker to be output from the subwoofer. When no subwoofer is used, (Speaker A) Front L/R is automatically set to “Full Band,” and bass sounds from each speaker are output from the front speakers. You can also set other speakers to “Full Band.”

You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments between 40-150 Hz. When using a THX-Select-certified speaker system, specify the setting of 80 Hz (THX) (default).

+_If you specify the frequency of the front speakers between 40-150 Hz, you cannot select “Full Band” for the other speakers.

For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is displayed.

If “Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for surround back speakers is displayed.

LPF of LFE (setting of the low-pass filter for LFE)

Specify the low-pass filter for LFE (Low Frequency Effect).

The low-pass filter passes through only the signal components below the specified frequency, eliminating the unwanted noise.

You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments between 40-150 Hz.

SW Mode (Subwoofer Mode)

This item is displayed when a subwoofer is used (any item other than “Not Used” is selected for Subwoofer on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu), and Front L/R is set to “Full Band” on the Speaker Crossover sub- menu. Set the sound from the subwoofer to any of the following:

LFE only: The subwoofer outputs only LFE (Low Frequency Effect) information.

D. Bass: The subwoofer outputs not only LFE (Low Frequency Effect) factors but also bass sounds from the front speakers.

Speaker Distance Sub-menu

Measure the distance between the listening position and each speaker. Specifying the distance will synchronize the speakers in terms of the time that sounds from each speaker reach the listening position. This is an important specification for you to enjoy realistic home theater. The settings in the Speaker Distance sub-menu can be configured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued

Perform the setup procedure below following the operating instructions described on page 86. 1. Select the unit of distance from “Unit.” You can select either “feet” or “meters.” The default varies depending on the region. . Set the distance you measured. Enter all the values for every speaker you connected. For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is displayed. If “Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for surround back speakers is displayed. When “feet” is selected: Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at 0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0 foot to 30.0 feet. The default is 12.0 feet. Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr BK R and Surr Bk L), and Surr L can be set at 0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0 foot to 30.0 feet. The default is 7.0 feet. When “meters” is selected: Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at 0.03 meter intervals in a range from 0.30 meters to 9.00 meters. The default is 3.60 meters. Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr BK R and Surr Bk L), and Surr L can be set at 0.03 meter intervals in a range from 0.30 meters to 9.00 meters. The default is 2.10 meters.

Notch Filter Sub-menu

To configure the settings under the Notch Filter sub- menu, a special measuring device is required. Usually, leave these settings to their defaults, “Off”

A notch filter cuts the signal of certain frequency ranges and passes the rest of the signal through. Some characteristics due to a room's environmental elements, including walls and smallness of the room, cause a signal peak in certain low frequencies to occur at the resonance frequency, resulting in a boomy sound. The filter reduces the signal at these frequencies causing the boomy sound.

To know which frequency the peak occurs at, use a low frequency sine wave generator and SPL (Sound Pressure Level) meter to check the frequency and the notch value.

Off (Default): Select this setting when not applying the notch filter. On: Select this setting when applying the notch filter.

‘When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch filer becomes effective at the frequency you specify here, With your measuring device, the frequency value can be set at 1 Hz intervals in a range from 20 Hz to 300 Hz. The default is 100 Hz.

When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch filter becomes effective at the value you specify.

You can specify intervals of 0.5 dB in a range from —15 dB to 0 dB. The default is -10 dB.

The available setting values are calculated based on

the values specified in the “Frequency” and “Depth” settings above. You can choose any values according to your favorite sound.

Level Calibration Sub-menu

Use this sub-menu to set the volume for each speaker so that each volume is heard by the listener at the same level. This is especially important for speaker layouts where the left and right speakers are at different distances or in asymmetrical positions due to room designs and configurations. These settings and the distance settings performed in the Speaker Distance sub-menu are vital for creating proper sound space and dynamics. The settings in the Level Calibration sub-menu can be configured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”

+ These settings cannot be made when the sound is muted, when you connect the headphones, and when you use multichannel playback.

You cannot use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial while you perform the Level Calibration settings. These settings are intended to bring sound levels between speakers into balance so as to obtain the proper sound space.

This unit supports the THX format and the test tone is output at a standard 0 dB (the Absolute Volume value is 82). If you usually enjoy listening at a lower level than the test tone, be careful of the test tone’s sudden loud sound. Note that the test tone will be output immediately after pressing the [ENTER] button in step 1 below.

. When you display this setting screen, select “Level

Calibration,” and press the [ENTER] button, the dis-

play changes to the Level Calibration screen, and at

the same time, a sound is emitted from the front left speaker.

Starting with the front speaker, press the [ A]/[W]

buttons to select a speaker, and press the [-@{]/[h]

buttons to set the volume level. When you have set all connected speakers, the setup is complete.

You can adjust in the range from —12 dB to +12 dB in

0.5 dB step. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the range

from -15dB to +12 dB in 0.5 dB step.

+ For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is displayed.

+ If “Surr Back is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for surrund back speakers is displayed.

SA Speaker/Output Setup—Continued 1 , 1-4 ft (0.3-1.2 m): This is the setting when the distance THX Audio Setup Sub-menu between speakers is 1-4 feet (30 cm-1.2 m). This is for setting up a home theater with a THX-Ultra2 >4 ft (1.2 m): This is the setting when the distance compliant speaker system. These settings will be between speakers is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more. effective in the listening mode for the THX Ultra? *ASA: Advanced Speaker Array Cinema and THX Music Mode. The settings in the THX Audio Setup sub-menu can be configured for both Audio Output Assign Sub-menu “Main A” and “Main B.” This setting allocates audio output jacks on the THX Ultra2 Subwoofer A/ TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to input (play) sources. The THX Ultra2 Subwoofer B setting varies depending on the connection conditions. x The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is equipped with This is for setting the connected subwoofer. Select analog output jacks for five lines, and digital output ne Ne according to your subwoofer’s jacks: optical jacks (OPT) for two lines, and coaxial Yes: Set “Yes” if your subwoofer conforms to the THX js (COMM roro is ‘our yes Sn ts Ultra? standard or if the playback capability of its bass whether output should be variable or fixed. range extends down 10 20 Hz. Otherwise, set “No The default settings are as follows: No (Default): Set “No” if you use any subwoofer that does not fit the conditions above. Terminals Default input settings +_ For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not Analog 1 (AUDIO OUT 1) Video 1 Rec Out Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no Analog 2 (AUDIO OUT 2) Video 2 Rec Out associated setting item is displayed. Analog 3 (AUDIO OUT 3) Video 3 Rec Out Boundary Gain Compensation 4 Analog 4 (AUDIO OUT 4) Zone 2 Out Boundary Gain Compensation B Analog 5 (AUDIO OUT 5) Zone 3 Out This is for setting the correction of boundary gains pi 1 Out (DIGITAL QUT OPTIGAL 1)_ Tape 1 Rec Qui This item can be set when “THX Ultra? Subwoofer” is Op 2 Où (DIGITAL OUT OPTIGAL 2)" | Tape 2 Rec Ou set to “Yes.” Coax 1 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1) | Video 1 Rec Out Room boundaries (wall) or other characteristics (such Coax 2 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 2) [Zone 2 Out as construction materials) may increase the perceived Analog 1-5 acoustics levels at low frequencies. Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener may Set the analog audio output jacks of “AUDIO OUT 1-5: experience an excessive bass effect. You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out, The purpose of this feature is to compensate for Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out, excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used. On: Boundary Gain Compensation is applied. … Off (Default): Boundary Gain Compensation is not D © applied. _ Distance Between Surr Back À SP/ Distance Between Surr Back B SP This setting is allowed only when “Main 2ch” is Example 1: selected from the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. When input (REC) of a sound recording device (e.g.. a Place two surround back speakers as close together as cassette deck) with TAPE 1 as an input source is possible, measure the distance, and set the value (See connected to AUDIO OUT 1, set “Analog 1” to “Tape 1 the figure). The maximum effects will be realized by Rec Out” THX’s ASA* technology. Example 2: When sound input of a picture recording device (e.g., à VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected to AUDIO OUT 2, set “Analog 2” to “Video 1 Rec Out.” Example 3: When the amplifier for Zone 2 is connected to AUDIO OUT 5, set “Analog 5” to “Zone 2 Out.” When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used.” 0-1 ft (0-0.3 m)(Default): This is the setting when the distance between the speakers is 0-1 foot (0-30 cm). 91 Oo &

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued

Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out

This item is displayed when “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” is specified for Analog 1-5 above. The default setting for “Zone 2 Out” is “Pre Out (variable)” and for “Zone 3 Out” is “Line Out (fixed).

Pre Out (variable): Select this when you want to set “variable” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or Zone 3. You should operate the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS5000E to adjust the sound volume from the device in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Line Out (fixed): Select this when you want to set “fixed” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or Zone 3. You should operate the amplifier connected to the terminal to adjust the sound volume from the device in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Opt 1 Out, Opt 2 Out, Coax 1 Out, Coax 2 Out

Specify a setting for “DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2” and “DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2”

You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out, Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used.

Example 1: When input (REC) of an audio recording device (e.g., an MD recorder) with TAPE 2 as an input source is connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1, set “Opt 1 Out” to “Tape 2 Rec Out.”

When input (IN) of a picture recording device (e.g., a DVD recorder) with VIDEO 2 as an input source is connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 2, set “Opt 2 Out” 10 “Video 2 Rec Out.”

When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used”

This setting allows you to enable/disable audio output from the HDMI terminal. Use this setting when the HDMI terminal of a TV is connected to the HDMI terminal of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and you want to enable HDMI audio output of the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E from the TV speakers. Usually leave this setting to its default, “Disable.”

Disable (Default): Disables HDMI audio output. Enable: Enables HDMI audio output.

Video Output Assign Sub-menu

This setting allocates video output jacks on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to input (play) sources. The setting varies depending on the connection conditions.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is equipped with composite video output jacks for four lines, and S video output jacks for four lines.

The default settings are as follows:

Composite Video 1-3, S-Video 1-3

This is a setting for the composite video output jacks (VIDEO OUT 1-3) and S video output jacks (S VIDEO OUT 1-3).

For Composite Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor

Out A, Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec

Out, Video 3 Rec Out, Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not

+ You can set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” only when “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” is selected from the Audio Output Assign sub-menu.

For S Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor Out A,

Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out,

Video 3 Rec Out, and Not Used.

When the video port of a picture recording device (e.g.

a VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected

to VIDEO OUT 2, you should set “Composite Video 2”

to “Video 1 Rec Out”

When you want to connect a TV set to VIDEO OUT 3

to watch it in main room A, set “Composite Video 3” to

When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used”

Composite Video 4, S-Video 4

The composite video output jacks (VIDEO OUT 4), and S video output jacks (S VIDEO OUT 4) are fixed to Monitor Out À, you cannot change this setting. You should connect à TV set and a projector used in main room À to VIDEO OUT 4 or S VIDEO OUT 4.

—& Input Setup Items described here are set when you press the input source buttons. The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is equipped with several types of jacks in addition to the standard audio and video jacks, and multiple jacks are provided for each type. You may freely assign input sources such as CD, PHONO, TUNER, TAPE 1, TAPE 2, and VIDEO 1-7 to these jacks. Moreover, you can preset a listening mode, specify names for display, adjust audio delays, correct the difference in the volume level from other input sources, and set the 12V trigger. In particular, please be careful when setting the input jacks. Please properly specify settings for correct selection of pictures and audio to be played by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet. In the case of NET AUDIO, you can specify settings for the server (See page 95). Settings defaults are as follows: OSD Indication Audio Assign Video Assign Analog Audio | Multichannel| Digital Audio | iLINK S-Video | Component | HDMI Video Name of Terminal | AUDIOIN | MULTI-CH | DIGITALIN| iLINK | VIDEOIN | SVIDEOIN |COMPONENT) HDMIIN to be Set IN VIDEO IN NET AUDIO Ne No No No Last Last Last Last cp 1 2 CE No Last Last Last Last PHONO Phono No No No Last Last Last Last TUNER No No No No Last Last Last Last TAPE 1 2 No op3 No Last Last Last Last x [rez 3 No Coax 1 No Last Last Last Last 5 bw 4 ï on No 1 i RCA | HDMI # [vmeoi 5 No Coax2 No 2 2 RCA2 HDMI 2 À [rnroz 6 No Cowx3 No 3 3 RCA 3 Video VIDEO 3 7 No op4 No 4 E RCA 4/BNC | Video VIDEO 4 8 No CE No 5 No No Video _& VIDEOS 9 No Coax 4 No 6 No No Video 4 VIDEO 6 No No Coax 5 No No 5 No Video VIDEO7 | Front (fixed) No Front Opt No Front (fixed) | Front (fixed) No Video xed)

Note: Defaults may differ depending on your region.

Input Setup—Continued

Follow procedures below to change any setting:

1 Pressthe [INPUT] button, andthen rollthe scroll wheel to select the input source that you want to set.

2 Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [SETUP] button. The Main Menu appears onscreen.

3 Use the [AJ/[W] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [ENTER] button.

The sub-menu is displayed.

2.mput setu 22 Input 100000

4 Usethe[AJIV] buttons to select an item you want to set, and then use the [-{]/[B-] buttons to set the desired value.

Other items should be selected in the same way.

5 Press the [RETURN] button. The display returns to the sub-menu.

6 Repeat procedures 4-5 to set desired items sequentially. When all of the items are set, go to procedure 7.

7 Press the [SETUP] button. Settings are completed and the menu screen disappears.

When you perform the procedures on the TX-NR1000/

TX-NRS5000E, after selecting the input source using the

input source buttons, press the [SETUP] button. Next,

select the menu you want to configure by turning the

[SELECT/PRESET] dial and press the dial to confirm

the selection. Then, after selecting the sub-menu you

want to configure by turning the [SELECT/PRESET]

dial, select your value by turning the [CONTROL/

TUNING] dial, and press the dial to confirm the value.

If you want to go back to the previous operation, press

In assignment of a DVD recorder to input of VIDEO 1,

when the analog audio input is connected to “VIDEO

1;” the digital audio to “COAXIAL 2," and the video to

#S VIDEO 2” and “COMPONENT 2°

1. Press the [INPUT] button, and then roll the scroll wheel to select “VIDEO 1.”

2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [SETUP] button to display the Main Menu.

3. Use the [ AJ/[W] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [ENTER] button.

4. Use the [ À [ W] buttons to select “Audio Assign” from the sub-menu, and then press the [ENTER] button.

5. Usethe [ A /[W] buttons to select “Analog Audio!” and then use the [-Æ}/[B>] buttons to select “1°

6. Usethe [ A /{W] buttons to select “Digital Audio,” and then use the [-@{]/[B-] buttons to select “Coax 2.

7. Press the [RETURN] button to return to the sub-menu.

8. Usethe[ A V/[W] buttons to select “Video Assign, ” and then press the [ENTER] button.

9. Usethe[ AVI W] buttons to select “S-Video. and then use the [-@]/[B] buttons to select “2.”

10. Use the [ A J/[W] buttons to select “Component Video,” and then use the [-@]/[B-] buttons to select “RCA 2°

. Press the [SETUP] button.

Setting is completed and the menu screen disap- pears.

Audio Assign Sub-menu (when input is other than NET AUDIO)

The following are settings for audio. When input is “NET AUDIO” see the following page.

The following are settings for analog audio output: Phono: Select the device connected to “AUDIO IN PH°

1 elect the device connected to the jack of “AUDIO IN 1-97

No: Select this when no device is connected.

1: Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTI- CHIN 1” 2: Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTI- CHIN 2” No (Default): Select this when no device is connected.

The following are settings for “Multichannel 1” or “Multichannel 2” described above, and cannot be specified separately for each input source. For example, when the input source is CD and “Surrond Back Channel” is set to “Not Used (5.1 ch)” for “Multichannel 1,” switching the input source to DVD and “Surround Back Channel” to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch)” Will also change “Surround Back Channel” associated with CD to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch).”

Not Used (5.1 ch): Select this when not using the surround back channel.

SBL/SBR (7.1 ch) (Default): Select this when using the surround back channel.

Input Setup—Continued

Subwoofer Sensitivity

The following are also settings for “Multichannel 1” or “Multichannel 2” (cannot be specified separately for each input source).

Some DVD decks output the LFE channel at -15 dB lower than the other channels in the multichannel output.

The level setting under the Level Calibration sub-menu is applied to the analog and digital inputs as well as the multichannel input. Therefore, in this setting, you can set the optimum LFE channel level applied only to the multichannel input.

You can select from 0 (Default), +5, +10 and +15 dB.

The following are settings for digital audio output. Opt 1-Opt 6: Select the device connected to “DIGITAL IN OPTICAL 1-67

Coax 1-Coax 6: Select the device connected to “DIGITAL IN COAXIAL 1-67

No: Select this when no device is connected.

For digital connections, you can set the digital signals to be detected preferentially. When “Digital Audio” is set 10 “No” on the Audio Assign Sub-menu above, this item is not displayed.

Auto: Automatically detects the format of input signals. The signal format (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM, AAC, etc.) used for the selected source is automatically detected, and necessary decoding is performed.

DTS: Select for DTS decoding. You should select this if you feel it takes 100 long to detect the signals when you have selected “Auto,” or if you dislike noises caused by CDs fast forwarding or rewinding.

If any sound other than DTS is input, there is no sound. PCM: Select for PCM decoding. You should select this if you dislike omission of the top of a subsequent tune when you have selected “Auto.”

If any sound other than PCM is input, there is no sound. Note:

When playing any DTS-type CD or LD, always select “Auto” and “DTS.” Selecting “PCM” will cause noises.

i LINK When you connect multiple devices using the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, the device names in the i.LINK connection appear and you can choose the input device from them using the cursor ([J/[B>]) buttons. The device selected here will be the preferred device among the connected i.LINK (AUDIO) devices.

No: Select this when connected i.LINK (AUDIO) devices are not selected as input devices.

Music Server Sub-menu (When input is NET AUDIO)

Video Assign Sub-menu The following are settings for video.

1-6: Select the device connected to the “VIDEO IN 1- 6” jack.

Last: Select this when you want video signal from the device you last selected to be output.

No: Select this when no device is connected.

1-6: Select the device connected to the “S VIDEO IN 1- 6” jack.

Last: Select this when you want video signal from the device you last selected to be output.

No: Select this when no device is connected.

RCA 1-4: Select the device connected to the “COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1-4” jack.

BNC (European and Asian models only): Select the device connected to the “COMPONENT VIDEO IN” BNC type jack.

Last: Select this when you want video signal from the device you last selected to be output.

No: Select this when no device is connected.

1: Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 1” jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the HDMI IN 1 terminal will also be output to the HDMI OUT terminal.

2: Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 2” jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the HDMI IN 2 terminal will also be output to the HDMI OUT terminal.

VIDEO: Select this when you want the video signal such as Composite Video, S Video, and Component Video to be output from the HDMI OUT terminal. Last: Select this when you want video signal from the device you last selected to be output.

No: Select this when no device is connected.

Input Setup—Continued

Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu

You can specify a listening mode you frequently use for each input source.

When a picture you like and frequently watch is a Dolby Digital source, for example, you may specify “Dolby Digital,” and if a CD of classical music you are fond of is a PCM source, you can specify “Pure Audio.” Selecting “Last” will set the same listening mode as the one you last specified for that source.

IF “Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the option “PL IIx” is set to “PL IL”

If “Surr L/R” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, or TV Logic.

If both of “Center” and “Surr L/R” are set to “Not Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, or Full Mono.

Analog/PCM Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing PCM $ignals from CDs and analog signals from records and casstte tapes. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo (Default), Mono, PL IIx/ NEO:6, THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing Dolby Digital signals. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main À.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby Digital (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

DTS Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing DTS signals. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DTS (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AII Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2) Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

AAC Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing AAC Signals. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, AAC (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AIl Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

i.LINK (IEEE 1394):DVD-Audio

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing DVD-Audio on a device connected to the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DVD-Audio (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AI Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

i.LINK (IEEE 1394):SACD Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing Super Audio CD on à device connected to the i. LINK (AUDIO) terminal.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, SACD (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AIl Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing digital signals such as Dolby Digital recorded through two channels. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as the Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, PLIIx/NEO:6 (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AI Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Input Setup—Continued

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing digital signals such as Dolby Digital and AAC recorded in monaural. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono (Default), Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, AIl Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for AAC sound multiplex broadcasting (e.g., a bilingual broadcast). This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex (Default), Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio- Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex, Dolby VS, and Last.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for analog multichannel connection.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multichannel (Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing audio output signals at 192 kHz and 176.4 KHz such as DVD-Audio. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below: (Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, and Last.

Direct, Stereo, and Last.

Character Edit Sub-menu Character Display

Specify whether or not the name given to an input source should be displayed.

No: The name given is not displayed. Only the name of the input source is displayed.

Yes (Default): The name given is displayed when the input source is replaced.

When “Yes” is selected for “Character Display” above, you can name the input source.

You are allowed to enter up to ten characters.

Carry out the following operations on the Character Input screen:

2-4.Character Input =Input : VIDEOS: b.Character

M Jabcdefghijkim noparstuvuxyz 0123456789-." O+x/=, 2512

1 Press the [W] button to select “Character, and then press the [b-] button to display the Character Input screen.

2 Pressthe [AVI VJ/I-@}/[b] buttons to select characters you want to enter, and then press the [ENTER] button.

3 Repeat step 2 above to enter up to ten characters. If you have selected the wrong character: Pressing [RETURN] moves the cursor back to the previous character. To change a character:

1. Press the [ENTER] button (repeatedly) to locate the cursor on the character to be cor- rected.

2. Press the [-@]/[B-] buttons to select the new character, and then press the [ENTER] button.

If the name is shorter than ten characters, enter

blanks to make the length of the name ten characters.

4 Press the [SETUP] button. Setup is complete, and the menu screen disappears.

To erase all the characters entered: At step 1 above, press the [4] button instead of the [>] button.

Input Setup—Continued

IntelliVolume Sub-menu

When multiple devices are connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, the volume may vary for a device even when volume settings on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS5000E are identical.

Reducing the variance in the volume level will allow you to enjoy sounds at the same volume level without adjusting the volume control on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E.

Use the [4] button when the volume is louder than other devices, and the [B-] button when the volume is quieter.

You can set at 0.5 dB intervals within a range from —12.0 dB to +12.0 dB. The default is 0.0 dB.

This section describes how to adjust the delay of sounds.

When the picture is not synchronized with the sound, you can synchronize them using these settings. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from 0.0 ms to 300.0 ms.

Relative Delay - Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back

Our proprietary “Enhanced Special Positioning Algorithm” (an extended three-dimensional positioning algorithm) fine tunes the sound field. This algorithm is able to create a maximum delay of 10 ms in the output of each speaker. This delay is equivalent to a distance of about 3 meters between speakers. This option can be set for both Main A and Main B.

+ When “Center” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, there is no setting for “Center” Likewise, if “Surr L/R” is set to “Not Used,” or “Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi- Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” there is also no setting for corresponding speakers.

You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from

—10.0 ms to +10.0 ms. The default is 0.0 ms.

Use this function to fine tune your surround

environment after setting the distance between speakers

(See page 89) and the volume level (See page 90).

Extending the distance between speakers (widening the

delay in time) will expand the sound field, while

reducing the distance (narrowing the delay) will make the sound field sharper.

12V Trigger Assign Sub-menu

When the 12V TRIGGER OUT jack on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO000E is connected to the12V TRIGGER IN jack of a device, you can specify the room where you are going to trigger the device to turn on the power (for connection details, see page 46). The default settings are as follows:

Room setting Delay Trigger À Main 0 Trigger B Zone 2 1 Trigger C Zone 3 2 Trigger D of 0 Trigger E Main 2

Trigger A-E The following are settings for the 12V trigger jacks A- E:

Off: Select when not using.

Main: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in the main room.

Zone 2: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in Zone 2.

Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in Zone 3.

Main/Zone 2: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in the main room or Zone 2. Main/Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in the main room or Zone 3. Zone 2/Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a connected device only used in Zone 2 or Zone 3. Main/Zone 2/Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a connected device used in any area: main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.

When a 12V trigger-connected device is powered on, a large amount of current may, depending on the device type, flow instantaneously. To ease the effects of this problem, you can set time interval differences for output signals from the 12V Trigger.

Setting time interval differences may prevent unnecessary noise (bubbling sounds).

0 sec: Select when not setting any difference.

1 sec: Select when setting output signals 1 second after power on to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

2 sec: Select when setting output signals 2 seconds after power on to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

3 sec: Select when setting output signals 3 seconds after power on to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

This menu allows you to configure the listening mode settings including audio effect and playback options.

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the Mono listening mode.

This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default): The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the noise when the source contains emphasized treble sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio movie recorded onto videotape.

This option configures the output method when you play the stereo input source in the Mono listening mode. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Auto L+R (Default) : The same audio signals are output from the left and right speakers.

Left: When you play an input source with different languages recorded on each channel, the left channel is output from the left and right speakers.

Right: When you play an input source where different languages are recorded on each channel, the right channel is output from the left and right speakers.

This option configures the speakers to use when playing the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected.

Center A (Default) : Outputs the source only from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

Center B: Outputs the source only from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal. Center A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

Front L/R A: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. Front L/R B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Front L/R A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi- amp or in BTL configuration.

When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,” “Center B;” “Center A+B;" and “Front L/R A!

When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Front L/R A," “Front L/R Band “Front L/R A+B." In this case, the default setting is “Front L/R A7

When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,” “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B;° and “Front L/R A+B When the impedance setting for either “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” “Front L/R A+B” cannot be selected. Similarly, when the impedance setting for either “Center A” or “Center B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” “Center A+B” cannot be selected.

When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set 10 an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set 10 an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used!”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Multiplex Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode.

This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default): The effects are not applied.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the noise when the source contains emphasized treble sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio movie recorded onto videotape.

b. Multiplex Input Channel

This option allows you to select the preferred audio channel when the input is the AAC/Dolby Digital sound multiplex signal. This option can also be set for Zone 2. The input channel setting made here will be applied to all the listening modes for the Dolby Digital and AAC input signal “1+1” sources.

Main (Default): The main channel is preferred for output.

Sub: The sub-channel is preferred for output. Main+Sub: The main and sub-channel are output.

This option configures the speakers to use when playing the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected.

Center A: Outputs the source only from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal. Center B: Outputs the source only from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal. Center A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

Front L/R A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

Front L/R B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Front L/R A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi- amp or in BTL configuration.

When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A;

“Center B;” “Center A+B,” and “Front L/R A When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B;° and “Front L/R A+B." In this case, the default setting is “Front L/R A!

When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A; “Front L/R A; “Front L/R B;° and “Front L/R A+B When the impedance setting for either “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” “Front L/R A+B°”

cannot be selected. Similarly, when the impedance setting for either “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” “Center A+B” cannot be selected.

When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback

Stereo Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the Stereo listening mode.

This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ or Academy effect is applied or not in the Stereo listening mode. Use these effects when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default): The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the noise when the source contains emphasized treble sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio movie recorded onto videotape.

This option configures the speakers to use when playing the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and * A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in BTL configuration.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Direct, Pure Audio Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu,

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will

be “A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in BTL configuration.

This option configures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening

mode. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal. B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Multichannel Input Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play an analog multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.

This option selects the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 5.1ch analog multichannel source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E. The surround back setting you select here will be applied to all of the multichannel input signals. This option will not appear when the Surr Back Channel setting in the Audio Assign sub-menu is set to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch)”

When the “(Speaker A) Sur Back” is set to “BTL for Front” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PL IIx Movie (Default): Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode.

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main À Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PL Ix Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as à 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

b. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not when playing an analog multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when

the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays an analog multi

channel source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio

CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers

you want to use are connected. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays an analog multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays an input source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays an input source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi- Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B°

When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Be

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E plays an input source such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio Input Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play DVD-Audio that is input from the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface.

This option allows you to set the bass level for the i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signals. The available settings are —c dB, -20 dB, -10 dB, and 0 dB. The option defaults to “0.

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you

play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source

through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The surround

back setting you select here will be applied to the

i LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signal **/2,°

+ When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main A Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

PLIX Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as à 6.1 or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode.

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off (Default): Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays DVD-Audio. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will

be “A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays DVD-Audio. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays DVD-

Audio. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays DVD- Audio. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

‘When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

‘When the settings for “(Speaker A) Sur Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and “B-° A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO000E plays DVD-Audio. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD Input Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a Super Audio CD input from the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface.

This option allows you to set the bass level for the i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD input signals. The available settings are —c dB, -20 dB, —-10 dB, and 0 dB. The option defaults to “0.”

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The surround back setting you select here will be applied to the i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD input signal “*/27

+ When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main A Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie."

PLIIXx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off (Default): Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E plays a Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers

you want to use are connected. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to “Main A in

the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays a Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays a Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set 10 “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRSO0O00E plays a Super Audio CD. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays a Super Audio CD. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Dolby Digital Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

This option allows you to set the bass level for the Dolby Digital listening mode, The LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input signals.

The available settings are —c dB, -20 dB, -10 dB, and O0 dB. The option defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for Zone 2.

This option allows you to set how the Late Night function works (See page 55). The setting you select here will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input signals. Note that the Late Night setting will not be retained and will return to “Off” after the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS0O00E enters the standby state. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off: Disables the Late Night function.

Low: Narrows the volume range.

High: Narrows the volume range more than the “Low” setting.

c. Dolby EX This option configures the Dolby EX effect when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode. Auto: Automatically plays a source using the Dolby EX mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital EX identification signal. When this signal is not contained, the setting of “SB Mode (Sch)” is applied.

Manual: The setting of “SB Mode (Sch)” is applied regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identification signal.

This option allows you to select the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. The surround back setting you select here will be applied to the Dolby Digital input signal “*/2

+ When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie (Default): Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1

or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main À Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIX Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic Ix Music

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

e. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound. Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you

want to use are connected. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will

be “A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu,

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configure the surround back speakers to use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B”

When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the DTS listening mode.

This option allows you to set the bass level for the DTS listening mode, The LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the DTS input signals. The available settings are —c dB, -20 dB, -10 dB, and 0 dB. The option defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for Zone 2.

This option allows you to select the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. The surround back setting you select here will be applied to the DTS input signal “*/2.

+ When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main A Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie”

PLIIX Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. + When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B? in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is

set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B” A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in BTL configuration.

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

A and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and “BB”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the AAC listening mode.

This option allows you to set the bass level for the AAC listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the AAC input signals. The available

settings are —c dB, -20 dB, —-10 dB, and 0 dB. The option defaults to “0. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The surround back setting you select here will be applied to the AAC input signal “+72

+ When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

+ When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to “Main A Ich (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as

c. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use: when playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and B7

When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and “B"

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6 (2ch Input only) Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a 2ch input source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Center” or “(Speaker A) Surr Back” setting is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. + When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” the PLIT mode will be used instead of the PLIIx mode.

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you play a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source through the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. The surround mode setting you select here will be applied to the Analog/PCM and D.F. 2ch input signals.

+ The option “NEO:6 Music” will be available when the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

PLIIx Movie (Default): Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or

higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

PLIIX Music: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

PLIx Game: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game mode.

NEO:6 Cinema: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source using the DTS NEO:6NEO:6 Cinema mode.

NEO:6 Music: Plays a 2ch source as à 6.1 or higher channel source using the DTS NEO:6 Music mode.

b. PLIIx Music Panorama

This option allows you to configure the panorama effect during the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode. This effect will expand the sound space horizontally.

On: The panorama effect is turned on.

Off (Default): The panorama effect is turned off.

c. PLiIx Music Dimension

This option allows you to change the entire sound space location either forward or backward during the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode. The option defaults to “3° The value “3” locates the sound space to the center position. If you select values between “2” and “0,” the sound space moves forward. If you select values between “4” and “6,” the sound space moves backward. Tips:

‘When you feel the sound space is too expanded or that there is too much surround effect, move the sound space forward to obtain a better balance. When you feel the sound space is just like a mono source or is 100 narrow, move the sound space backward to obtain a better balance.

d. PLiix Music Center Width

This option allows you to adjust the sound image width which the center speaker covers during the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode. When you play the source in the Dolby Pro Logic II mode and the center speaker is connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, the center channel signal is output only from the center speaker (if the center speaker is not connected, the center channel signal will be equally divided into the left and right front speakers to create a virtual center sound image). In this option, adjust the output balance between the center and front left/right speakers to determine the scale for the central sound image. The available settings for this option are between “0” and “7.” The default value is “3

e. NEO:6 Music Center Image

This setting can be made when the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

The DTS NEO:6 Music mode is a listening mode in which an original 2ch source is played as a 6ch source. In this mode, the signal for center channel will be created from the signals deducted to some extent from the left and right front channels. This option allows you to configure how much the signals are deducted from the left and right channels to produce the center channel

image. The available settings for this option are between “0” and “5.” The default value is “2.”

f. Re-EQ This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effect is not applied.

On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub- menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This

setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is

set to “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the surround speakers to use: when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting fo “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi- Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you apply the THX effect in the THX mode. The settings in this sub-menu can be made when the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

a. Surround EX This option configures the Surround EX effect. Auto: Automatically plays a source using the Surround EX mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital EX identification signal. When the Dolby Digital EX identification signal is not contained and the signal is from the multichannel source, the setting of “SB Mode ch)” is applied. When the signal is from the 2ch- source, the setting of “SB Mode (2ch)” is applied. Manual: The setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied when the signal is from the multichannel source, regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identification signal. When the signal is from the 2ch source, the setting of “SB Mode (2ch)” is applied.

This option allows you to select which THX mode the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E will use when applying the THX effect to the signal. The THX Mode you select here will be given preference over the SB Mode (5ch). + When the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is “Main A Ich” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “THX Cinema” and “SurroundEX.” THX Cinema: This mode is suitable for theater movies that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized for playing in a large space such as a movie theater. SurroundEX: The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E automatically enters the THX Surround EX playback mode. Ultra2 Cinema (Default): In this new mode for the THX Ultra?, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E plays

5.1ch music or movie as a 7.1 or higher channel source.

Musie Mode: This new mode for the THX Ultra? is suitable for a music source. In this mode, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays a 5.1ch music source as a 7.1 or higher channel source.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

Games Mode: In this new mode for the THX Ultra2, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E plays 5.1ch game source as a 7.1 or higher channel source.

This option allows you to select which THX mode the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E will use when applying the THX effect to the signal.

THX Cinema: This mode is suitable for theater movies that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized for playing in a large space such as a movie theater. Games Mode: In this new mode for the THX Ultra2, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E plays a 2 ch game source as a 7.1 or higher channel source.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will

be “A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers.

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp on in

This option configures the center speaker to use when

playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select

the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when playing the source with the THX effect applied.

Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu,

When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Mono Movie Setup/Enhance Setup/ Orchestra Setup/Unplugged Setup/ Studio-Mix Setup/TV Logic Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the Onkyo original listening mode. The settings in this sub- menu can be made when the (Speaker A) Surr L/R setting is set 10 an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

This option allows you to turn off the reverb for the front speakers. This is useful when playing live material that already contains live reverberation as the added reverb simply blurs the original sound, When the Front Effect is turned off, no reverb is added to the front left, front right, and center speakers and the original reverberation can be heard as it is.

On (Default): The Front Effect is turned on and the reverb is added.

Off: The Front Effect is turned off.

This option allows you to adjust the amount of reverb to suit your listening environment, source material, and so on. The available settings are Small, Mid, and Large. The option defaults to “Mid.”

This option allows you to adjust the reverb time to suit your listening environment, source material, and so on. The available settings are Short, Mid, and Long. The option defaults to “Mid.”

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub- menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B? in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will

be “A” and “B A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in BTL configuration.

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is

set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

+ When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Be

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set 10 an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

All Ch Stereo Setup/Full Mono Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect and playback options when you play a source in the AII Ch Stereo or Full Mono listening modes. The settings in this sub-menu can be made when the (Speaker A) Center setting is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ or Academy effect is applied or not in the Onkyo original listening mode. Use these effects when you do not Want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default): The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for home theater.

Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the noise when the source contains emphasized treble sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio movie recorded onto videotape.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

10 the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A? in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. + When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A and “B.” A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals. B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the surround back speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front,” “Bi- Amp for Front,” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be

“A” and “B When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and “(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and Bo

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS À terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR BACK L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set 10 an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Dolby Virtual Speaker Setup Sub- menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the playback options when you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.

This option allows you to configure the width of a virtual sound image which is simulated using two or three speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect. Wide: The breadth of the sound image is emphasized.

Reference (Default): The general 5.1ch surround sound is simulated.

This option configures the front speakers to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R° is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub- menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Front L/R A” or “Front L/R B° in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be “A” and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS A and FRONT L/R SPEAKERS B terminals. Note that this option is not

available when the front speakers are in Bi-amp or in

This option configures the center speaker to use when playing the source. Select the speaker terminal to which the speaker you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A° in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Center A” or “Center B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set 10 “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speaker

connected to the CENTER SPEAKERS A terminal.

B: Outputs the source from the speaker connected to the

CENTER SPEAKERS B terminal.

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected

to the CENTER SPEAKERS A and CENTER SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speaker terminals to which the speakers you want to use are connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R° is

set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

+ When the impedance setting for “Surr L/R A” or “Surr L/R B” in the Speaker Impedance sub-menu is set to “6 ohms” or “4 ohms,” the available options will be A and “B”

A (Default): Outputs the source from the speakers

connected to the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A terminals.

B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected to

the SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

A+B: Outputs the source from the speakers connected 10 the SURR L/R SPEAKERS A and SURR L/R SPEAKERS B terminals.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing the source. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set 10 an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal. A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

In Zone 2, you can set the following options.

This option allows you to configure the width of a virtual sound image which is simulated using two speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.

Wide: The breadth of the sound image is emphasized. Reference (Default): The general 5.1 ch suround sound is simulated.

This option allows you to select the decode mode before the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is applied.

Dolby Pro Logic Il: The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is applied after the signal is decoded with Dolby Pro Logic IL.

DTS NEO:6: The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is applied after the signal is decoded with DTS NEO:6.

Dolby Headphone Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to enable/disable the Dolby Headphone function when you use the headphones.

On (Defalt): Enables the Dolby Headphone function. Off: Disables the Dolby Headphon function.

You can adjust bass, mid, and treble notes for each

+ For any speaker set to “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is displayed.

Option for adjusting bass notes from front L/R speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0: This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Option for adjusting mid notes from front L/R speakers.

Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “02” This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Option for adjusting treble notes from front L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default i This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Option for adjusting bass notes from the center speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Option for adjusting mid notes from the center speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Option for adjusting treble notes from the center speaker Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is *

Option for adjusting bass notes from surround L/R speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “02”

Option for adjusting mid notes from surround L/R speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “02”

Option for adjusting treble notes from surround L/R speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “02”

Option for adjusting bass notes from the surround back

speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12

dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

+_If“Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not displayed.

Option for adjusting mid notes from the surround back

speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12

dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

+ If “Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” and “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not displayed.

Option for adjusting treble notes from the surround

back speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

—12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0”

+_If“Surr Back” is set to “BTL for Front” or “Bi-Amp for Front” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not displayed.

Option for adjusting bass notes from the subwoofer. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0

This menu allows you to configure the listening mode settings including audio effects and playback options.

Volume Setup Sub-menu a. Volume Display

You can switch the volume indication between an absolute value and a relative value.

Absolute (absolute value): Displayed in a range from 0 10 100.

Relative (relative value) (Default): Displayed in a range of — dB, -81.5 dB, -80 dB18.0 dB. An absolute volume value of 82 is equivalent to a relative volume value of 0 dB.

You can adjust the volume level of muted sounds. Specify at 10 dB intervals in a range from —< dB and — 50 dB to —10 dB. The default is “20

This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can set the maximum output volume level to prevent sounds from becoming too loud. When displaying in absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in a range from 50.0 to 99.5. When displaying in relative values, specify at 0.5 dB intervals in a range from -32 dB to +17.5 dB. If you do not want to set any specific value, leave this item “Off,” the default setting.

This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can set a constant volume level of sounds output when the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is powered on. When displaying in absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in a range from 0 to 100. When displaying in relative values, specify at 0.5 dB intervals in a range from — dB and -81.5 dB to +18 dB (Max). If you want 10 maintain a selected volume level setting when putting the apparatus into standby status, select “Last.”

This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

Headphone Level Setup Sub-menu

When the volume level differs between speakers and headphones, you can, in advance, fine tune the headphones volume. Adjust at 0.5 dB intervals in a range from —12 dB to +12 dB.

Specify whether or not to display the On Screen Display (OSD) on the TV screen connected to the component

video terminal. This option can be set for both Main A and Main B.

OSD On (Default): OSD is displayed.

OSD Off: OSD is not displayed.

b. Immediate Display

Specify whether or not to display the description of operations on the screen while you are operating the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E (when the component video signal is output, nothing is displayed if set to On). This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

On (Default): Displayed.

Specify the position where the Immediate Display should be displayed. You can set in a range of ten positions from Top to Bottom of the screen. By default, it is displayed at the Bottom of the screen. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

Specify whether or not to output the video signal with interlace mode.

Interlaced: Outputs with interlace mode. Noninterlaced: Does not output with interlace mode.

e. Net-Tune OSD Display

Specify whether or not to display a description of operations on the screen when using Net-Tune (when the component video signal is output, nothing is displayed if set to On). This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

On (Default): Displayed.

OSD Position Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to adjust the position of the OSD Setup Menu as it is displayed on your screen. Depending on the monitor used, there may be cases where the OSD Setup Menu is not displayed in the center and parts of the menus are cut off. To adjust the position of the OSD Setup Menu, simply press the cursor buttons to inch the menu to the position you desire. This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

This menu can be used when connecting to an Onkyo i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device.

Wakeup Setup a. Wakeup on i.LINK (IEEE 1394)

Specify connecting condition on standby of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Enable: To be left connected.

Disable (Default): To be disconnected while the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is on standby to save electricity.

a. OSD for DVD Even when a DVD player is directly connected to the TV, the OSD screen of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E can be displayed on the TV monitor if the DVD player is an Onkyo i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device. In this case, use the LINK cable to connect the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the DVD player. Disable (Default): Select this to block OSD screen display.

Left: Select this to display the OSD screen on the left side of the TV monitor.

Right: Select this to display the OSD screen on the right side of the TV monitor.

b. Select DVD Select the name of the device that should display the OSD screen using the [@]/B] cursor buttons if multiple Onkyo i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices are connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. This item does not appear when “Disable” is selected in the OSD for DVD setting.

Select “No” when you do not want to select any device.

OSD for DVD (Zone 2)

When listening in Zone 2, the same setting as above is available.

DVD Output Synchro a. i.LINK Selector Change

enabled, audio signals of SACD will be output through i.LINK when no source is selected for Zone 2, or it will be output in analog format when any source is selected for Zone 2.

If using a broadband router (DHCP function), you need not perform “7. Network Setup” because the DHCP function on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is defaulted to “Enable.” When the DHCP function for the broadband router is set to

“Disable/” network setup is required. In this case, you have to

be knowledgeable about the network.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and Auto IP are the mechanisms that automatically perform network settings such as IP address on a network device such as the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, a PC, and a broadband router. DNS (Domain Name System) is the mechanism that converts a domain name, such as “www.onkyo.com/p/” used to browse a homepage, to an IP address such as *210.199.170.69” used in actual communications.

IP Address Sub-menu a. DHCP Settings

Specify whether or not to set DHCP automatically. Enable (Default): Enables the DHCP function. Disable: Disables the DHCP function.

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.” When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is connected directly to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, enter the IP address provided by your ISP. The IP. address to be entered must be in the following format. You cannot use the net audio function with an IP address that is not in the following format.

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.” When an xDSL modem or à terminal adapter is connected directly to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. The subnet mask is usually “255.255.255.0/

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.” When an xDSL modem or à terminal adapter is connected directly to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.

e. DNS Server 1, DNS Server 2

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.” When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is connected directly to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E, enter the DNS address provided by your ISP. If connected to a gateway (router), enter the IP address of the gateway.

When you are informed of a single DNS address, enter the address into “e. 1st.” If informed of two or more, enter one into “. 2nd.”

Specify when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.

Some ISPS (Internet service providers) use a proxy server to connect to the Internet. In this case, follow the written instructions from the provider to set the proxy. Enable: Enables the proxy server function.

Disable (Default): Disables the proxy server function.

Enter the domain name of the proxy server. When “Disable“ is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this item and pressing the [ENTER] button will put the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E into the character entry mode. Press the [ À J/[ Ÿ 1/[-<J/LB>] buttons to select numerics, and then press the [ENTER] button. When all numerics are entered, exit from the character entry mode.

Enter the port No. of the proxy server. When “Disable” is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this item and pressing the [ENTER] button will put the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E into the character entry mode. Press the LA JULY J/L</D] buttons to select numerics, and then press the [ENTER] button. When all numerics are entered, exit from the character entry mode.

When the settings are complete, press the [RETURN] button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the LAV/TW] buttons to select “—Save Settings,” and then press the [BB] button to save settings. After setting, saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data, be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will be lost.

MAC Address Sub-menu a. MAC Address

Confirm the MAC address of your PC. You cannot change the MAC address.

Network Setup—Continued

While the system sending information is called a server, the machine receiving the data is called a “client” Multiple clients can be connected to a single server. From the viewpoint of Net-Tune Central, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is a client.

Confirm the client name used on the Net-Tune system. The client name is assigned by the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. You cannot change the assigned name.

b. Wakeup on LAN Specify the network condition on standby of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Enable: To be left connected.

Disable: To be disconnected while the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E is on standby to save electricity.

Specify the TCP/IP port to communicate with Net-Tune Central. This setting is to determine the port for intercommunication and needs to match the setting at Net-Tune Central. Do not change the port number unless absolutely necessary. Press the [ À J/ W 1/4} [>] buttons to select numerics, and then press the ENTER] button. When all numerics are entered, exit from the character entry mode.

When the settings are complete, press the [RETURN] button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the LA V/[W] buttons to select “— Save Settings,” and then press the [>] button to save settings described in “Network Setup” on pages 121 and 122. After setting, saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data, be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will be lost.

Ethernet port: I0BASE-T File type: MP3, WMA, WAV

(supports non-compression format and sampling frequency of 32 , 44.1, 48 kHz)

(WMA files with contents protected cannot be played)

The following sub-menus allow you to lock your settings or display the software version of the TX-NR1000/

You can lock all of the setting menus to prevent settings from being changed by mistake.

Locked: Powering on and off will resume the setting when it was locked, discarding any modification that was made after locking.

Unlocked (Default): No lock on setting operations.

Firmware Version Sub-menu

Fhis section deals with confirmation of the firmware version for each program curently installed in your TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E (No procedure is provided for updating the firmware).

Confirm the firmware version for the main program.

b. i.LINK(IEEE 1394) version

Confirm the firmware version for i.LINK.

Confirm the firmware version for the Net-Tune program.

Confirm the firmware version for HDMI.

@ Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Ÿ Controller

The RC-557M/558M remote controller is a useful too that can operate not only the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E, EMEIMES

but also all the other components of your home theater. To DVD mode is used to control an Onkyo DVD player operate any component other than the TX-NR1000/ connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via RI. TX-NR5000E with the RC-557M/558M remote control- To select DVD mode, press the [MODE] button, and ler, press the [MODE] button and use the scroll wheel 10 then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the select the component to operate. Before operating a digital display.

component including satellite tuner, cable TV, VCR, and Note:

TV with the RC-557M/558M, you need to program the While neither the [INPUT] button nor [MODE] button

remote control codes of the operated digital component is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input into the RC-S57M/S58M. source and remote controller mode simultancously

There are two methods. One method is selecting the {when you enter the DVD mode, be sure that the LCD name of a different brand from the table, entering the display shows “DVD” in both of the top and bottom setting number listed, and calling up the pre-program- lines). ming code (See page 130). The other method is sending

the commands from the other brand’s remote control

directly into this remote controller (See page 136). Scroll wheel

Operating Onkyo Products Using the RI Connection

Connecting your RI-compatible Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, DVD player, or cassette recorder to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E via RI allows you to con- trol your system with the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's

A remote controller by pointing it at the TX-NR1000/

SP TX-NR5000E. Since you don’ have to enter any special codes, or do any programming, I allows you to control these components quickly and easily. See page 47 for con- nection information.

To use the RI function, you must make an RI connec- tion and an analog RCA/phono connection between the AV component and your TX-NR1000/TX-NRS5000E, even if they are connected digitally.

Ï 1 Press the [MODE] button. @—UE) Ï

2 Roll the scroll wheel to select your favor- « ite mode. @

When operating the Onkyo DVD player, select

When operating the Onkyo CD player, select

When operating the Onkyo MD player, select PIE =

“MD” E When operating the Onkyo cassette tape deck, Fr e 5 a

press the scroll wheel to display “AMP!” (E) D © © ©

& Point the remote controller toward the front panel of the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E, and press the appropriate RC-557M buttons for your operation. RC-558M

SA Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller —Continued

@ ON button This button is used to turn on the DVD player.

@ STANDBY button This button is used to set the DVD player to Standby.

@) Number/letter buttons These buttons are used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers and to enter times for locating spe- cific points in time.

@) MODE button This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the display. @) TOP MENU button This button is used to select a DVD's top menu. @ Up/Down/Left/Right [A J/[V /[-@}/[b-] & ENTER buttons These buttons are used to navigate DVD menus and the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus. The [ENTER] button is used to start playback of the selected menu title, chapter, or track and to confirm settings. ® CH/DISC +/- button This button is used to select discs on a DVD changer. @) RETURN/EXIT button This button is used to exit the DVD players onscreen setup menu and to restart menu playback. @) DISPLAY button This button is used to display information about the current disc, title, chapter, or track, including the elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on. 4à Previous/Next [164 J/[»»1] buttons The Previous | He ] button is used to select the pre- vious chapter or track. During playback it selects the beginning of the current chapter or track. The Next [ »æ1] button is used to select the next chapter or track. @D FR/FF [4 JL» ] buttons The FR [ « ] button is used to start fast reverse. The FF [ >» ] button is used to start fast forward. € Pause [ff] button This button is used to pause DVD playback. 43 Step/Slow [-«i]/[i-] buttons These buttons are used for frame-by-frame play- back and slow-motion playback. 3) SUBTITLE button This button is used to select subtitles. € AUDIO button This button is used to select foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).

à REPEAT button This button is used to set the repeat playback func- tions.

4) A-B button This button is used to set the A-B repeat playback function.

&) Open/Close [=] button This button is used to open and close the disc tray.

€) LIGHT button This button is used to turn on or off the remote con- troller’s illuminated buttons.

@) CLEAR button This button is used to cancel functions and to clear entered numbers.

@ÿ INPUT button This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the display.

@) MENU button This button is used to select a DVD’s menu.

@ VOL 1/1 button This button is used to set the volume of the

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

@) SETUP/GUIDE button This button is used to access the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus.

s button is used to mute the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

@ Play [B-] button This button is used to start DVD playback.

@) Stop [li] button This button is used to stop DVD playback.

€3 RANDOM button This button is used with the random playback func- tion.

s button is used to select different camera angles.

& LAST M button This button is used with the last memory function, which allows you to resume DVD playback from where you left off.

@) MEMORY button This button is used with the memory playback func- tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of titles, chapters, or tracks.

6) SEARCH button This button is used to search for titles, chapters, tracks, and specific points in time.

SA Operating Onkyo Products Using the R

emote Controller —Continued

Boxed numbers are for MiniDise mode (See page 127).

CD mode is used to control an Onkyo CD player con- nected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E via RL. To select CD mode, press the [MODE] button, and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on the dis- play.

While neither the [INPUT] button nor [MODE] button is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously (when you enter the CD mode, be sure that the LCD display shows “CD” in both of the top and bottom lines).

() ON button This button is used to set the CD player to On or Standby.

@) Number/letter buttons These buttons are used to enter track numbers.

@ MODE button This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on the display.

(@) CH/DISC +/- button

This button is used to select discs on a CD changer.

This button is used to display information about the

current disc or track, including the elapsed time,

remaining time, total time, and so on.

Previous/Next [He« ]/[»»1] buttons

The Previous [H#« ] button is used to select the pre- vious track. During playback it selects the begin- ning of the current track. The Next [»#1] button is used to select the next track.

FR/FF [««]/[»» ] buttons The FR [ «| button is used to start fast reverse. The FF [ »# ] button is used to start fast forward.

(8) Pause [If] button This button is used to pause CD playback. REPEAT button This button is used to set the repeat playback func- tions. {) Open/Close [=] button

This button is used to open and close the disc tray. @) LIGHT button This button is used to turn on or off the remote con- troller’s illuminated buttons. CLEAR button This button is used to cancel functions and to clear entered numbers. INPUT button This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on the display. VOL i/1 button This button is used to set the volume of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. MUTING button his button is used to mute the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

SA Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller —Continued

This button is used to start CD playback. €? Stop [li] button

This button is used to stop CD playback.

{3 RANDOM button This button is used with the random playback func- tion.

4) MEMORY button This button is used with the memory playback func- tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of tracks.

MiniDisc mode is used to control an Onkyo MiniDisc recorder connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via RI. To select MiniDisc mode, press the [MODE] button, and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the display. Note: While neither the [INPUT] button nor [MODE] button is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously (When you select “TAPE2” as the top line, “MD” appears in the bottom line.) 1: ON button This button is used to set the MiniDisc recorder to On or Standby. 2 Number/letter buttons These buttons are used to enter track numbers and 10 enter times for locating specific points in time. 3 MODE button This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the display. 4 DISPLAY button This button is used to display information about the current disc or track, including the elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on.

5 Previous/Next [H#« ]/{»>»1] buttons The Previous | H#« ] button is used to select the pre- vious track. During playback it selects the begin- ning of the current track. The Next [ m1] button is used to select the next track.

6 FR/FF[-<««]/{»» ]buttons The FR | « ] button is used to start fast reverse. The FF [ >» ] button is used to start fast forward.

7 Pause [IE] button This button is used to pause MiniDisc playback.

8 REC [@] button This button is used to start MiniDisc recording.

This button is used to set the repeat playback func- tions.

This button is used to set eject the MiniDisc. LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con- troller’s illuminated buttons.

This button is used to cancel functions and to clear entered numbers.

This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until STAPE2” appears on the display.

This button is used to set the volume of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

s button is used to mute the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

This button is used to start MiniDisc playback. Stop [li] button

This button is used to stop MiniDisc playback. RANDOM button

This button is used with the random playback func- tion.

s button is used with the memory playback func- tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of tracks.

Tape mode is used to control an Onkyo cassette recorder connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via RI. To select Tape mode, press the scroll wheel, placing your remote controller into “AMP” mode. Note: While neither the [INPUT] button nor [MODE] button is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously (When you select “TAPEL” as the top line, “AMP” appears in the bottom line.).

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select the remote controller modes. Press the scroll wheel until “AMP” appears on the display.

Previous/Next [H«« J/[»»1] buttons The Previous | H#« ] button is used to select the pre- vious track. During playback it selects the begin- ning of the current track. The Next [#1] button is used to select the next track. The Previous/Next | Kk« J/[»#1] buttons may not work properly with some cassette tapes depending on how they were recorded. Rewind/FF [««]/[»» ] buttons The Rewind [ -#« | button is used to start rewind. The FF [w» ] button is used to start fast forward. (@) REC [@] button This button is used to start tape recording. LIGHT button This button is used to turn on or off the remote con- troller’s illuminated buttons. INPUT button This button is used to select the input source. Press this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until “TAPEL” appears on the display. VOL 1/1 button

his button is used to set the volume of the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. MUTING button This button is used to mute the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E. This function can be set only with the remote controller. Play [B-] button This button is used to start tape playback. © Stop [IN] button This button is used to stop tape playback. Reverse Play [] button

his button is used to start reverse playback.

Using the Remote Controller with Other

You can use the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E’s remote controller (RC-557M/558M) to control your other AV components, including those made by other manufac- turers. To do this you can:

+ Enter a remote control code for the component that you want to control (e.8., DVD, TV, VCR).

Learn commands directly from the other component’s remote controller (see page 136).

Use the Macro function to learn a sequence of actions (see page 137).

Entering a Remote Control Code

By entering the appropriate remote control code for each of your components, you can control each compo- nent by selecting the relevant remote controller mode: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL (cable), or SAT (satellite).

1 Look up the appropriate remote control code for the component. See “Remote Control Codes” on pages 130-133.

Press and hold down the [CUS- TOM] button for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “PRGRM/ and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the the remote controller mode you want to use with the component, and then press the scroll wheel. The following remote controller modes can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL, or SAT.

If the code is accepted, the following appears on the display for a while, and then the normal display reappears.

If the code is not accepted, after the message “RETRY” has been displayed, the code entry display reappears, and you should try entering the code again. To cancel this procedure at any point, press the [CUSTOM] button.

6 Select the remote controller mode, point the remote controller at the component, and check its opera- tion.

The remote controller buttons that can be used in DVD mode are shown on page 124. Those that can be used with the TV, VCR, CBL, and SAT modes are listed on pages 134 and 135.

Remote Control Codes for an Onkyo DVD player

The remote control code that you use with an Onkyo DVD player depends on whether it's connected via RI, as follows: 5001: Use this code if you’ve connected an I cable and an RCA/phono analog audio connection cable to your DVD player. This is the default setting, so if you're using 1, you don't need to change it. Point the remote controller at the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E to operate the DVD player. 5002: Use this code if your DVD player doesn't have an RI socket, or you're not using RL. Point the remote controller at the DVD player to operate it.

SA Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

SA Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your satellite tuner. Perform this operation while both the [MODE] and [INPUT] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to operate only the satellite tuner without changing the input source, press the [MODE] button and roll the scroll wheel to select “SAT”

2. Point the remote controller at your satellite tuner, and use the following buttons (you must enter appropriate remote control code first).

Controlling a VCR ON,—l STANDBY =] a : (e] 9 © Scroll wheel =] [=] MODE lle È æ LS TS À CH/DISC +/— _ VOL 1/1 Ç MUTING ea] “1e Te RECe

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source and the remote controller mode for your VCR. Perform this operation while both the [MODE] and ENPUT] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to operate only the VCR without changing the input source, press the [MODE] button and roll the scroll wheel to select “VCR:"

2. Point the remote controller at your VCR, and use the following buttons (you must enter appropri- ate remote control code first).

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source and the remote controller mode for your TV. Perform this operation while both the [MODE] and ENPUT] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to operate only the TV without changing the input source, press the [MODE] button and roll the scroll wheel to select “TV.”

2. Point the remote controller at your TV, and use

the following buttons (you must enter appropri- ate remote control code first).

Controlling a TV Controlling a Cable Receiver T Ï onxvo oxxvo on, La on, STANDBY 1/0* STANDBY 0OS TV CH #7 2®9C Number —| Number 0e © GS buttons rv voLur buttons a60ole 806,0 s = Scroll wheel e Ci &æ || Scroll wheel MODE MODE) |æ TV INPUT. Ô FS EE ÿ CHIDISC +/— voir CHIDISC +/— a ©) Four NE AV LV EE De NP TES TE SL munne MUTING

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your cable receiver. Perform this operation while both the [MODE] and ENPUT] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to operate only the cable receiver without changing the input source, press the [MODE] button and roll the scroll wheel to select “CBL.”

2. Point the remote controller at your cable receiver, and use the following buttons (you must enter appropriate remote control code first).

ON, STANDBY Setthe TV to On or Standby Tv1/0 TV on/off ON, STANDBY Set the cable receiver to On or TV CH Select TV channel _ Sera - t # EL T9 chanreE CHDISC += Select cable channels Number buttons | Enternumbers Number buttons | Enter numbers CHDISC += Select cable channels TV INPUT Select TV or VCR input The following buttons control the TX-NR1000/ TV VOL 4/1 Adjust the TV volume TX-NR5000E.

*Buttons marked with an asterisk can always be used to control a TV regardless of the currently selected remote controller mode. These buttons do not work with the additional TV modes.

The following buttons control the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E.

Adjust the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Ë VOL 4/1 volume

NA SA Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

Learning Commands from Another Remote Controller

You can teach the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's remote controller new commands simply by transmitting com- mands from another remote controller one at a time. For example, by transmitting the Play and Stop commands from your CD player’s remote controller, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E’s remote controller can be taught to transmit those commands when its Play [BB] and Stop [I] buttons are pressed in CD mode.

This is convenient when you want to add commands to buttons after entering a remote control code (See page 129).

1 Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “LEARN/ and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the the remote controller mode you want to teach a new command, and then press the scroll wheel.

20 Sn DE 4 On the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's

remote controller, press the button you want to teach the new com- mand.

If you press a button that cannot be taught a new command, the message “RETRY® appears and you should press another button.

5 Point the remote controllers at each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5- 15 cm) apart, and then, on the other remote controller, press the button whose command you want to learn. When the command has been learned successfully, “OK” appears on the dis- play. You may need to press the button several times.

If the command is not learned success-

fully, after the message “FAIL? has been displayed, the mode select display reap- pears (step 3), and you should try again.

6 To teach the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000Es remote controller more new commands, repeat steps 3 through 5.

Press the [CUSTOM] button when you’ve finished.

+ The following buttons cannot be taught new com- mands: [LIGHT], [CUSTOM], [MACRO], [MODE], [INPUT], [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3], and the scroll wheel button.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E"s remote controller can learn a total of 150 commands. However, the commands of some remote controllers may use a lot of memory, in which case, this total will be reduced. If the message “FULL” appears, the remote control- ler cannot learn any more commands because its memory is full.

By default, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's remote controller knows the commands for controlling an Onkyo CD player, cassette deck, DVD player, and MD recorder (e.g., Play, Stop, Pause, etc, buttons). You can teach these buttons new commands, although the defaults will be restored if the remote controller is reset.

To teach a new command to a button that has already been taught a command, simply repeat this proce- dure.

Like most remote controllers, the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E's remote controller uses infrared. Commands from remote controllers that don’t use infrared cannot be learned.

When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all learned commands will be lost and will have to learned all over again, so don’t discard your other remote controllers.

SA Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

With the Macro function you can program the remote controller to perform a sequence of actions with one press of a button. For example, normally you need to perform the following actions to use a CD player that's connected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E:

Press the scroll wheel, (to select AMP mode). Press the [ON] button (to turn on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E).

Roll the scroll wheel to select CD (to select the CD remote controller mode and the CD input source).

Press the Play [B»-] button (to start the CD player).

With the Macro function you can program the remote controller to do all of this with one press of a button.

You can make up to eight macros, and each macro can perform up to eight actions.

Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “MACRO,” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “EDIT; and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a macro, and then press the scroll wheel.

Macros are numbered from 1 to 8.

Onthe remote controller, press the buttons whose actions you wantto program into the macro in the order you want them performed. To program the CD example in the left column into a macro: press the scroll wheel, press the [ON] button, roll the scroll wheel to select CD, press the scroll wheel, and then press the Play [| button.

Actions are numbered from 1 to 8.

Va Macro #1 selected El

After each button is pressed, “SET” fol- lowed by “KEY” is displayed.

To add an action that selects an input source for the main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3, press the [INPUT], [ZONE 2], or [ZONE 3] button, respectively, roll the scroll wheel to select the input source, and then press the scroll wheel.

When you've finished, press the Macro button.

After the following appears on the dis- play, the display returns to normal.

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components —Continued

Programmed macros can be run as follows.

Press the [MACRO] button.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the macro’s number, and then press the scroll wheel.

The actions in the macro are per- formed in the order in which they were programmed.

You can name your macros as follows. Names may con- tain of up to five characters.

Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

MOT RN PILE FU Roll the scroll wheel to select “MACRO,” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “NAME, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the number of the macro that you want to name, and then press the scroll wheel.

1! ! | —T1st character

Roll the scroll wheel to select a character, and then press the scroll wheel to set it The following characters are available. 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJK LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ+-=<> _7/\* space

Repeat step 5 until you've entered all 5 characters.

The previous menu reappears.

If the name you are entering consists of less than five characters, enter spaces at the end to the end to fill all five places.

Other Settings for the Remote Controller

Editing Remote Controller Modes Adding New Remote Controller Modes

You can add additional modes (DVD, TV, VCR, CBL, SAT) to the remote controller. This is useful if, for example, you have several DVD players or TVs.

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom mode.

1 Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- cusr

2 Roll the scroll wheel to select “MODE” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “ADD, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the type of mode you want to add, and then press the scroll wheel.

You can add up to 8 additional modes: for example, 4 DVD, 2 TV, 1 VCR, and 1 CBL.

Reordering the Remote Controller Modes

You can change the order in which the remote controller modes appear when you roll the scroll wheel. The posi- tion of the AMP mode cannot be changed.

1 Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “MODE,” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “SORT,” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the mode you want to move, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the mode before which you want to insert the specified mode, and then press the scroll wheel.

Here the specified mode will be inserted before the “VCR” mode.

Ifthe move is successful, after “OK” has been displayed, the SORT display (step 3) reappears.

Other Settings for the Remote Controller —Continued

Deleting Remote Controller Modes

Assigning Remote Controller Modes

You can delete remote controller modes that you don't need, such as modes for components that you don't have. The AMP mode cannot be deleted.

Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “MODE and then press the scroll wheel.

You can change the combination in selecting the input source and remote controller mode simultaneously using the scroll wheel. For example, when the input source (top) is “TAPET” and the remote controller mode (bottom) is “AMP? you can change only “AMP”(the remote controller mode) to “CDR.”

Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “MODE,” and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “DEL, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “ASSGN/" and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the mode you want to delete, and then press the scroll wheel.

If the mode is deleted successfully, after “OK” has been displayed, the DEL dis- play (Step 3) reappears.

Roll the scroll wheel to select an input source, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the mode you want to assign to the specified input source, and then press the scroll wheel.

If the assignment is successful, after “OK” has been displayed, the ASSGN display (step 3) reappears.

© —& Other Settings for the Remote Controller —Continued Resetting the Remote Controller 1 Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- You can reset the remote controller to its default set- cusrou ton for more than three seconds. tings. The remote controller enters Custom mode. 1 Press and hold the [CUSTOM] but- cusrou ton for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom Roll the scroll wheel to select RS mode. “SETUP/’and then press the scroll wheel. 2 Roll the scroll wheel to select “SETUP/'and then press the scroll wheel. Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR/ RF;’ and then press the scroll wheel. Roll the scroll wheel to select “RESET,’ and then press the scroll wheel. Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR” or“RF,’ and then press the scroll s wheel. ® When you select “IR. Roll the scroll wheel to select Ÿ “YES/” and then press the scroll Ge0 wheel. T Lédd The remote controller is reset to its — default settings. If you select “RF/" roll the scroll MILLE wheel to select the same ID as the 1 RF receiver, and then press the scroll wheel. Ÿ 1D50109 and A 10 F can be selected. Using the Remote Controller with Radio Frequency (RC-558M only) ES You can set the remote controller’s transmission signal format to either infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF). The default setting is IR. Roll the scroll wheel to select the This is useful when, for example, the TX-NR1000/ same channel as the RF receiver, TX-NR5000E is installed in a rack or is not in line of and then press the scroll wheel. sight of the remote controller as it allows you to use a Channels 0 to 3 can be selected. commercially available RF receiver to pick up com- Ÿ If the ID and channel have been set suc- mands from the remote controller, which are then fed to cessfully, “OK” appears on the display. the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E via its IR IN socket. For EN this to work, you must assign the same ID and channel ss 207 10 the remote controller and RF receiver. DK 4 141 NA Oo Oo)

SA Other Settings for the Remote Controller —Continued

Changing the Remote Controller’s

Control ID This section explains how to change the remote control- ler’s ID. You may need to change this if the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000Es remote controller inter- feres with other Onkyo components located in the same room.

If you change the remote controller’s ID, be sure to select the same ID on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E. For details on setting up the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRSOO0E"s remote control ID, refer to the “Remote Control Setup Sub-menu” section on page 87. The default ID for both the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E and remote controller is 1.

1 Hold down the remote controller’s [CUS- TOM] button for more than three seconds. The remote controller enters Custom mode.

2 Rollthe scroll wheel to select “SETUP” menu, and then press the scroll wheel.

3 Roll the scroll wheel to select ID menu, ess the scroll wheel.

Select the same ID as that set on the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E.

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening

Dolby Digital Dolby Digita/AAC [AAC | Analog Multichannel Input Signal Format PCM [Mutichannel| Muichamel| 2ch 170 41 Sich | Zi 2) |(Otherthan Button 2) ‘Iype of source] CD. IV.LD VHS, MD. DVD-Audio, Super Vinyl, Radio, DVD, Digital cable/sattelite, et. Audio CD Listening mode sen, Cable DIRECT [Direct v v v v v v v v PURE A [Pure Audio v v v v v v v v ISTEREO [Stereo v v v v v v v v Muttiplex + PLII Movie v v + PLII Music v v + PLII Game v v + PLIS Movie v v v v PLIS Musie v v v v PLIS Game v v Digital AAC v v 2 v v v v v v v 2 [Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX v v A DTs 2 [prsw24 IDTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix) v v + NEO:6 Cinema v v + NEO:6 Music v v Muttichannel v v ÉLLINKUEEE1394):DVD- Audio ÉLLINKUEEE1394):SACD THX + THX Cinema v v v v v v # + THX Ultra? Cinemal v v F + THX Musie Mode v v + THX Games Mode v v v v v v + THX SurroundEX v v Mono v v v v v v v v JAI Ch Stereo v v v v v v v v Full Mono v v v v v v v v A [Mono Movie v v v v v v v v & [Enhance v v v v v v v v & [orneta v v v v v v v v Ÿ fUnplugged v v v v v v v v Studio-Mix v v v v v v v v [TV Logic v v v v v v v v Oo

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode—Continued

Type of source ening mode

If you have any trouble using your TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, ook for a solution in this section. If you can't resolve the issue yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit

Can't turn on the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E?

+ Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the wall outlet. (USA, Canadian, and Australian models: make sure that the other end of the power cord is properly con- nected to the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000Es AC INLET)

+ Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five sec- onds or more, then plug the cable in again.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E turns off as soon as it's

+ The amp protection circuit has been activated.

Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immediately and contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit

The [STANDBY] indicator on the TX-NR1000/

TX-NR5000Ë remains lit?

+ _Itis supposed that the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is using a source in Zone 2 or 3. When not using, set both Zone 2 and 3 to “Off” (page 68).

External devices connected to AC OUTLET of the

TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E do not turn off even when

the unit is in standby mode.

+ _Itis supposed that the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is using devices in Zone 2 or 3. When not using, set both Zone 2

There's no sound, or it's very quiet?

+ Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all the way.

+ Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components are connected properly (pages 88, 93).

+ Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of each speaker terminal (page 25).

+ Make sure that the input source is properly selected (page 50).

+ Check the volume. It can be set from -81.5 to +18 (page 50).

The TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is designed for home the- ater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing for precise adjustment

+ _Ifthe MUTING indicator is shown on the display, press the remote controller s [MUTING] button to unmute the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E (page 52).

+ While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers (page 52).

+ Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some games consoles, such as those that sup- port DVD, the default setting is off

+ With some DVD-Video dises, you need to select an audio output format from a menu

+ Make sure that the correct input signal audio format is selected with the [AUDIO SELECTOR] button (page 55).

+ To use a turntable with an MC-type cartridge requires a commercially available MC phono preamp (page 38).

+ Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent, twisted, or damaged.

+ Not all listening modes use all of the speakers.

+ Specify the Speaker/Output Setup and Input Setup (pages 88-08).

Only the front speakers produce sound?

+ When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.

+ When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, only the front speakers produce sound.

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 88).

Only the center speaker produces sound?

+ If you use the Pro Logic IL/IIx Movie or Pro Logic IV/IIx Music listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV program, the sound is concen- trated in the center speaker.

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 88).

The surround speakers produce no sound?

+ When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce no sound (page 56).

+ Depending on the source and current listening mode, not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 88).

The center speaker produces no sound?

+ When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the center speaker produces no sound (page 56).

+ When the listening mode is set to “Mono.” no sound can be present in the center speaker.

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 88).

The surround back speakers produce no sound?

+ The surround back speakers are not used with all listening modes. Select another listening mode (page 56-58).

+ Not much sound may be produced by the surround back speakers with some sources.

+ Ifthe “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the “Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set to “Off” (pages 102-109).

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 88).

The subwoofer produces no sound?

+ When you play source material that contains no informa-

tion in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.

+ Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (pages 88, 89).

There's no sound with a certain signal format?

+ Check the input signal format setting. Depending on the playback source, you can select Auto, Multich, Analog, or i.LINK (page 55).

+ Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some games consoles, such as those that sup- port DVD, the default setting is off.

+ With some DVD-Video disces, you need to select an audio output format from a menu.

+ Depending on the input signal, some listening modes can- not be selected (page 143-145).

Can't select the DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix or THX Sur-

round EX listening modes?

+ These modes cannot be selected when no surround back speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is being used.

+ Ifthe “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the “Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set to “Off” (pages 102-109).

Troubleshooting—Continued

Can't get 6.1 or 7.1 playback?

+ If no surround back speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is being used, 6.1 and 7.1 playback is not possible.

+ _Ifthe “SB Mode (5ch)" is available in any sub-menu of the “Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set to “Off” (pages 102-109).

The volume cannot be set above 99?

+ When the levels of all speakers have been calibrated (page 90), the maximum volume setting may change.

+ Using cable ties 10 bundie audio cables with power cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the audio perfor- mance, so don't do it.

+ An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try reposi- tioning your cables.

The Late Night function doesn't work?

+ Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital (page 54).

The multichannel input doesn't work?

+ Check the MULTI-CH IN connections (page 64).

+ Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to the correct input source (page 64).

+ Set the audio input signal format to Multich (page 65).

+ When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops, the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E remains in DTS lis- tening mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is 10 prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM, because the TX-NR 1000/ TX-NR$000E does not switch formats immediately, you may not hear any sound, in which case you should stop your player for about three seconds, and then resume play- back.

+ With some CD and LD players, you won't be able to play- back DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E. This is usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed (e.g.. output level, sampling rate, or fre- quency response changed) and the TX-NR 1000/ TX-NR$000E doesn't recognize it as a genuine DTS sig- nal. In such cases, you may hear noise.

+ When playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player may pro- duce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.

+ Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all the way.

+ Make sure that each video component is properly con- nected.

+ Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “Video Assign” sub-menu under the “Input Setup” menu (page 95).

+ On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is connected is selected.

+ While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the video circuits are turned off and the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E outputs no video signals.

The onscreen menus (OSD) don't appear, or they

appear in an odd position?

+ Make sure that the proper setting is made for the Video Output Assign” sub-menu under the “Speaker/Output Setup” menu (page 92).

+ Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “OSD Setup” sub-menu under the “Preference” menu (page 119).

+ On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is connected is selected.

Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy, or

the FM STEREO indicator doesn't appear?

+ Relocate your antenna.

+ Move the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E away from your TV or computer.

+ Press the [TUNING MODE] button to turn off the “AUTO” indicator, bringing the FM mode 10 monaural (page 60).

+ When listening to an AM station, operating the remote con- woller may cause noise.

+ Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.

+ Concrete walls weaken radio signals.

+ If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor antenna.

When the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E is unplugged or a

power failure occurred:

+ Normally, the built-in memory retains its contents for 2 weeks. If it loses radio presets, make the presets again.

The remote controller doesn't work?

Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity (page 9).

+ Install new batteries. Don't mix different types of batteries or old and new batteries (page 9).

+ Make sure that the remote controller is not 100 far away from the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E, and that there’s no obstruction benween the remote controller and the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E'S remote control sensor (page 9).

+ Make sure that the TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is not sub- jected to direct sunshine or inverter type fluorescent lights. Relocate if necessary.

+ _Ifthe TX-NR1000/TX-NRS000E is installed in a rack or cabinet with colored glass doors, the remote controller may not work reliably when the doors are closed.

+ Make sure you've selected the correct remote controller mode (pages 49).

+ When using the remote controller to control other manufac- turers’ AV components, some buttons may not work as expected.

+ Make sure you've entered the correct remote control ID.

+ If you change the remote controller’s transmission signal format to RE, be sure to select the same ID as the RF receiver.

Can't control other components?

+ Ifits an Onkyo component, make sure that the I cable and analog audio cable (RCA/phono) are connected prop- erly. Connecting only an FR cable won't work (page 47).

+ Make sure you've selected the correct remote controller mode (pages 47).

Troubleshooting—Continued

Can't learn commandés from other remote control-

+ Make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote con- trollers are pointing at each other.

+ Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot be learned, especially those that transmit several instructions with a single button press.

+ On your recorder, make sure the correct input is selected (e.g. digital or analog).

+ Make sure that proper output settings are made for the con- nected devices. Settings are available in the “Rec Out” the “Audio Output Assign” and “Video Output Assign”® sub-menus under the “Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages 91,92).

Zone 2/3 has turned off?

+ Was the Sleep function set? The Sleep function turns off Zone 2/3 as well as the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E. To set the Sleep function for Zone 2/3 only, see page 67.

+ Recording and Zone 3 operation uses the same circuit and therefore cannot be used at the same time. Make sure that proper settings are made for outputs. Setting is available in “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” of the “Audio Output Assign” and “Video Output Assign” sub-menus under the “Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages 91, 92).

The Surr Back speaker setting doesn't appear?

+ If no surround back speakers are connected, or the sur- round back outputs are being used with Zone 2/3, this set- ting is unavailable

Can't access Internet radio or the Net-Tune server?

+ Check the connection between the TX-NR1000/ TX-NRS000E and the LAN port on your router or switch.

+ Make sure that your modem and router are properly con- nected, and make sure they are both turned on.

+ Make sure that the Network Setup settings are correct (page 121).

Playback stops while listening to Net-Tune tracks?

+ Make sure that your computer meets the system require- ments listed on page 72.

+ When you download or copy large files on your computer, Net-Tune playback may be interrupted. In this case, try closing any unused programs, use a more powerful com- puter, or use a dedicated server computer for Net-Tune Central.

+ _ If Net-Tune Central is serving WAV files to several clients at the same time, the network may become overloaded and playback may be interrupted. This can be resolved by pre- paring an Ethernet network exclusively for use with Net- Tune, separating it from general network traffic, and by using switches to improve network performance.

Can't geta list of Internet radio stations from the Xiva-

Net online database?

Can't access music on the selected server, or can't

connect to the server?

+ Make sure that your computer is turned on and that Net- Tune Central is up and running.

+ Add the MP3, WMA, and WAV files on your computer to the Net-Tune Central database. See the Net-Tune Central online help for details.

+ Serthe TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's POWER switch to OFF, wait five seconds, and then set it to ON again (On USA, Canadian, and Australian models, disconnect the power cord for five seconds, and then reconnect it). If that doesn't help, restart your computer.

+ Onthe Client Sub-menu, make sure that the NTSP Port set- ting is set to the same port number as Net-Tune Central. Correct as necessary (page 122)

Can't select albums?

+ Use Net-Tune Central to add album names to your music files.

Can't select artists?

+ Use Net-Tune Central to add artist names to your music files.

Can't select by genre?

+ Use Net-Tune Central to add genre names to your music files.

No playlists are available?

+ Use Net-Tune Central to create some playlists.

For other Net-Tune-related issues, please see the Net-Tune FAQ on the Onkyo Web site.

The sound changes when | connect my headphones?

+ When a pair of headphones is connected, its listening mode changes depending on the mode that was set before it was connected.

Can't change a setting?

+ Some settings are not available while using Net-Tune.

Can't use an audio adjust function?

+ Some audio adjust functions can’t be used with certain lis- tening modes.

The display doesn't work?

+ The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening mode is selected.

Troubleshooting—Continued

“Not available with Headphones use”

+ Operation not allowed while a pair of headphones nected.

“Not available in this Sp Config”

+ Doesn’t work with the current speaker configuration

“Only available with Dolby D”

+ Can be used with only Dolby Digital.

“Not available with this signal”

+ Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.

“Not available with Muting”

+ Operation not allowed because the TX-NR 1000/ TX-NRS000E is currently muted.

“Not available in this Listening Mode”

+ Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.

“Not available with NET AUDIO use”

+ Operation not possible with Net Audio selected for the input source.

“Not available with Dolby Headphone Off”

+ Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function off.

“Not available with Dolby Headphone On”

+ Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function on.

“Not available with zone2 out in Line out”

+ Operation not possible with “1-8.f. Zone 2 Out “Line Out!”

“Not available with zone3 out in Line out”

+ Operation not possible with “1-8.g. Zone 3 Out” set 10 “Line Out!”

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E uses a battery-less memory backup system in order to retain radio presets and other settings when it is unplugged or in the case of a power failure. Although no batteries are required, the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E must be plugged into an AC outlet in order to charge the backup system.

(On other than USA, Canadian, and Australian models, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E's POWER switch must be set to ON in order to charge the backup system). Once it has been charged, the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E will retain the settings for several weeks, although this depends on the environment and time will be shorter in humid climates.

The TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E contains a microcomputer for signal processing and control functions. In very rare situ- ations, severe interference, noise from an external source, or static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely event

that this happens, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it back in again.

To reset the TX-NR1000/TX-NR5000E to its factory defaults, turn it on and, while holding down the [VIDEO 1] button, press the [STANDBY/ONI button. When the reset is complete, “CLEAR" appears on the display and the TX-NR1000/ TX-NR5000E enters Standby mode.

Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the units malfunction. Before you record important data, make sure that the material will be recorded correctiy.

Power Supply Rating North American and some Asian models: European & Australian models:

USA & Canadian models: European & Australian models:

Standby Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x H x D):

Weight Inputs: Audio Multichannel (7.1ch) Inputs: Phono (MM) Line inputs:

QT 18" x8 11/16" X 18 15/16)" 33 kg (72.8 lbs)

9 (assignable), 1 (fixed) (Video 7 on the front panel)

6 6 (assignable), 1 (fixed) (Video 7 on the front panel)

6 (assignable), 1 (fixed, on the front panel) 6 (assignable), 1 (fixed, on the front panel)

4 (USA & Canadian models), 3 (others)

1 (other than USA & Canadian models)

2 BR in (1/8-inch mini-jack) for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround Back L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R or Powered

Zone 2 L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer Subwoofer

5 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)

2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)

2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)

3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B, Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out) 1 (fixed, Monitor out A)

3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B and Recout)

1 (fixed, Monitor out A)

2 (USA & Canadian models), 1 (others)

1 (other than USA & Canadian models)

IR out (1/8-inch mini-jack): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)

12V Trigger out (1/8-inch mini-jack); Inputs/Outputs: Miscellaneous i. LINK(AUDIO) (4 pin) Ethernet (Net-Tune RIU/S-inch mini-jack): RS232 (9 pin D-SUB Female connector): Antennas: FM: AM:

AC Outlets USA & Canadian models Asian & Australian models:

5 (for A, B,C, D, E)

75 ohms unbalanced Included loop antenna and external terminal

1 (Switched, 120 W IA max.) 1 (Switched, 100 W max.)

Power Output (AL cl USA & Canada (

Input Sensitivity and Impedance:

Video (DVD, VIDEO 1-5)

150 Watts per channel min. RMS into 8 ohms 2 channel driven, from 20 to 20,000 Hz with no more than 0.05% total harmonie distortion.

200 Watts per channel min. RMS into 6 ohms 2 channel driven, 1,000

Hz with no more than 0.1% total harmonic distortion.

260 Watts per channel min. RMS into 8 ohms 2 channel driven, 1.000 Hz with no more than 0.19% total harmonic distortion. (BTL] 200 Watts per channel min, RMS into 6 ohms 2 channel driven, 1,000 Hz DIN

280 Watts per channel min. RMS into 8 ohms 2 channel driven, 1,000 Hz DIN [BTL]

2 x 240 Wat into 6 ohms, 1.000 Hz (EIAI)

2 x 350 Wat into 8 ohms, 1.000 Hz (EIAI) [BTL]

2 x 340 W (3 Q, 2 channel driven) 2 x 260 W (4 Q, 2 channel driven) 2x 175 W (8 Q, 2 channel driven)

0.05% (rated power) 0.05% (1 watt output) 60 at 8 ohms

0.05% (rated power) 0.05% (1 watt output)

200 mV, 50 kQ (AUDIO IN 1-9/ FRONT)

Specifications —Continued

0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (PB/CB, PR/CR) 120 mV RMS at 1,000 Hz, 0.5% THD

5 Hz-100 kHz: +1/-3 dB 10 Hz-50 MHz: +1/-3 dB 20-20 kHz: 40.8 dB

212 dB at 50 Hz (Bass)

#12 dB at 1,000 Hz (Mid) #12 dB at 20,000 Hz (Treble) 80 dB (PHONO, IHF À. 5 mV input)

95 dB (LINE, IHF A, Due to setup menu

FM Tuning frequency Range USA & Canadian models:

Other models Usable Sensitivity Stereo

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity Mono Stereo Capture Ratio Image Rejection Ratio: IF Rejection Ratio: SAN: Mono Stereo Alternate Channel Attenuation: Mono Selectivity AM Suppression Ratio: Harmonic Distortion: Mono Stereo Frequency Response: Stereo Separation:

87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 200 kHz steps 87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 50 kHz steps

30 to 15,000 Hz, +/-1.0 dB 45 dB at 1.000 Hz

30 dB at 100 to 10,000 Hz 17.2 dBf, 2.0 pV (75 Q)

NA AM Tuning frequency Range: USA & Canadian models:

530 to 1710 kHz, 10 KHz steps

European & Australian models:522 to 1611 kHz, 9 KHz steps

Usable Sensitivity Image Rejection Ratio IF Rejection Ratio:

522 to 1611 kHz, 9 kHz steps or 530 to 1710 kHz, 10 kHz steps *selectable

Specifications and features are subject to change without

18 Park Way, Upper Saddie River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.